Quarterlytics / Communication Services / Department Stores / Debenhams plc / FY2013 Annual Report

Debenhams plc
Annual Report 2013

DEB · LSE Communication Services
Claim this profile
Ticker DEB
Exchange LSE
Sector Communication Services
Industry Department Stores
Employees 10,000+
← All annual reports
FY2013 Annual Report · Debenhams plc
Loading PDF…
A leading international, 
multi-channel brand 

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013

Highlights
Robust results during a challenging year 

Gross transaction value

£2.8bn

3,000

2,500

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

0

Revenue

£2.3bn

2,500
2,250
2,000
1,750
1,500
1,250
1,000
750
500
250
0

Profit before tax

£154.0m

200

175

150

125

100

75

50

25

0

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

Dividend per share

Basic earnings per share

3.4p

4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

0.5

0.0

10.2p

10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

To view our online report visit: ar13.debenhamsplc.com

Note: All numbers for 2011 on a 52 week 
basis. Profit before tax  is stated before 
exceptional items.

Annual Report and Accounts 20131

Who we are 

Debenhams is a leading 
international, multi-channel 
brand with a proud British 
heritage trading out of  
238 stores in 29 countries  
and online in 67 countries. 

We offer our customers  
around the world a unique, 
differentiated and exclusive mix 
of own brands, international 
brands and concessions.

Committed to a  
sustainable future 
We have changed the way we talk 
about sustainability in this year’s annual 
report in order to reflect better our 
approach. Rather than a separate 
report, sustainability is embedded  
in the strategic report because this  
is how we approach it as a business.  
For Debenhams, sustainability is part  
of everyone’s role.

Strategic report

Overview

2  Chairman’s letter 

4  Market overview

Strategy

8

Chief Executive’s strategic review

12  Business model

14 Strategy at a glance

16 Focusing on UK retail

20 Delivering a compelling customer proposition

24 Increasing availability and choice  

through multi-channel

28 Expanding the brand internationally

32 Key performance indicators 

34 Leading the way in responsible retailing

Financial review

36 Chief Financial Officer’s report 

42  Risk review

Directors’ report
52  Directors’ report

Corporate governance report
55  Chairman’s introduction to governance

56 Board of directors

58 Corporate governance report

Directors’ remuneration report
67 Introduction to Remuneration Committee

68 Remuneration policy

Financial statements

Accounts

83 Statement of directors’ responsibilities

84  Independent auditors’ report to the members  

of Debenhams plc (Group)

85 Consolidated Income Statement

86  Consolidated Statement of  
Comprehensive Income

87 Consolidated Balance Sheet

88 Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

89 Consolidated Cash Flow Statement

90 Notes to the financial statements

127  Five year record income statements

128 Five year record balance sheets

129  Independent auditors’ report to the  

members of Debenhams plc (Company)

130 Company Balance Sheet

131 Notes to the Company financial statements

Other information
138  Store list

139 Glossary and references

140 Shareholder information

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 2

Chairman’s letter 
Focusing on what we do best

Ensuring we have robust 
governance processes  
in place is one of the 
important aspects of  
my role as your chairman.

Dear
shareholder

2013 was a year of progress for Debenhams in many 
ways. Despite an extremely difficult trading environment, 
we focused on what we do best: giving our customers 
outstanding, innovative products and excellent service 
across all channels and geographies. As a result, we 
achieved increases in like-for-like sales and market  
share as well as growth in earnings per share.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 20133

December 2013 marks  
the bicentenary of the 
Debenhams name 
appearing on the British 
high street... We have 
endured by focusing  
on our customers and 
anticipating and adapting  
to their needs.

Committed to  
good governance
At Debenhams we are committed  
to high standards of corporate 
governance. We believe it is central  
to the continued strong performance  
of the business in a manner which is 
sustainable over the long-term and  
to maintaining the confidence of  
our shareholders.

For us, good governance is about 
responsible and effective management 
of the business in a way which 
demonstrates honesty, transparency 
and accountability.

See P55 for the Chairman’s introduction  
to governance.

One of the most exciting projects undertaken in 2013 was the transformation of Oxford 
Street into our international flagship store (read more about this on page 10). The work 
will be completed during the first half of the 2014 financial year, in time for peak trading.  
I would encourage everyone who has the opportunity to visit the store to do so. The 
store modernisation programme has also continued elsewhere in the UK estate in line 
with our aspiration for all our customers to have a modern and contemporary place  
to shop. 

Amongst the many benefits that we believe the transformed Oxford Street will bring  
is its role as a beacon for international expansion. Debenhams is one of very few 
department store concepts that has translated successfully into international markets.  
In 2013, international sales accounted for nearly 19% of Group gross transaction value 
and we expect this to continue to grow in future years.

Capital allocation continues to be an important issue for both the board and our 
shareholders. We have clear priorities for cash, the first of which is to invest in the 
business to deliver long-term, sustainable growth and you can read more about our 
capital expenditure in 2013 on page 40. Our second priority is the dividend and the 
board has recommended a final dividend for 2013 of 2.4p, taking the total dividend  
for the year to 3.4p, an increase of 3%. 

Innovation is reflected in every part of our business, whether product development or 
making shopping easier using multi-channel technology. This is why we have followed 
the early adoption of some of the new BIS regulations on corporate reporting where  
the strategic report is followed by a directors’ report, a corporate governance report 
and the remuneration report, which sets out both the remuneration policy and how  
it has been implemented. The financial statements follow this section. Although the 
regulations come into force after our year end, the demand for more context and a more 
holistic presentation of a company and its direction is consistent with our commitment 
to shareholders to operate an integrated and transparent business. Another change we 
have made is embedding our approach to sustainability throughout the report to show 
our commitment to having a sustainable business at every level. 

Ensuring we have robust governance processes in place is one of the important aspects 
of my role as your chairman. You can read more about this in the corporate governance 
report starting on page 58. During 2013 we were delighted to welcome two new 
non-executive directors to the board. Peter Fitzgerald joined us in October 2012 and 
Stephen Ingham in January 2013. 

We have changed the venue for the 2013 Annual General Meeting which will be held  
on 10 December 2013. We look forward to welcoming shareholders to our new head 
office located at 10 Brock Street, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3FG. We moved  
in August and are already seeing benefits of having all our head office colleagues 
located in one purpose-built office for the first time. 

December 2013 marks the bicentenary of the Debenhams name appearing on the 
British high street. During those 200 years our business has operated under many 
different structures and a myriad of different market conditions. Debenhams has 
endured by focusing on our customers and anticipating and adapting to their needs.  
We can only do this through the hard work and dedication of our people. As a board  
we do not take for granted the supreme effort that they make every day, especially  
in the difficult market conditions we have faced in the past couple of years. We thank  
each of them for the contribution they have made to Debenhams in the past year  
and look forward to success in 2014.

Nigel Northridge
Chairman

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 4

Market overview
Understanding the context

Figure 1: GfK Consumer Confidence Index

What was the wider market context that you operated in during 2013?

0
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
-30
-35

2
1
p
e
S

t
c
O

v
o
N

c
e
D

n
a
J

b
e
F

r
a
M

r
p
A

y
a
M

n
u
J

l

u
J

3
1
g
u
A

Source: research carried out by GfK 
on behalf of the European Commission

Figure 2: BRC-Springboard Footfall Monitor

2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6

2
1
p
e
S

t
c
O

v
o
N

c
e
D

n
a
J

b
e
F

r
a
M

r
p
A

y
a
M

n
u
J

l

u
J

3
1
g
u
A

Figure 3: BRC-Nielsen Shop Price Index,
clothing and footwear
0%

-2%

-4%

-6%

-8%

-10%

-12%

2
1
p
e
S

t
c
O

v
o
N

c
e
D

n
a
J

b
e
F

r
a
M

r
p
A

y
a
M

n
u
J

l

u
J

3
1
g
u
A

Figure 4: LFL sales and temperature chart

l

%
s
e
a
s
e
k

i
l
-
r
o
f
-
e
k
L

i

20

15

10

5

0

-5

-10

-15

-20

-25

6

4

2

0

-2

-4

-6

-8

C
º
Y
L

s
v
e
r
u
t
a
r
e
p
m
e
T

March

April

May

-10

LFL sales

Temperature vs LY

The UK economy provided no benefit to the performance of the retail sector, 
including Debenhams, during 2013 even though a double dip recession was 
avoided. Inflation (CPI) was 2.7% in the year to August 2013. Consumers felt the 
impact of higher housing costs, food prices and fuel costs for their homes and 
vehicles which outstripped wage increases, resulting in a decline in real income 
(source: CEBR). Unemployment for the most recently available period (May to  
July 2013) remained high at 7.7% with many of the new jobs created during the  
year being part-time and/or at minimum wage.

Has there been any improvement in consumer confidence over the past year?

Consumer confidence remained firmly in negative territory throughout the year 
(see figure 1), although there was some improvement in the last quarter with the 
GfK Consumer Confidence Index rising to its highest level in three years in August 
2013. However, this has yet to drive any meaningful increase in retail sales. Nick 
Moon, Managing Director of Social Research at GfK, explains the paradox of rising 
confidence but falling real income thus: “The explanation probably lies in the fact 
that there has been a steady flow of economic good news over the past few 
months showing the economy growing – however anemically – and even the 
double dip recession revealed by revised ONS figures never to have existed.  
With these figures receiving far more prominence than reports about declining 
real incomes, it is perhaps not surprising that people react to all this good news  
by declaring themselves more optimistic.”

What were the key market trends in 2013? 

The key trends centred around the growth in multi-channel shopping and  
the implications for both store and non-store sales. Overall market expenditure  
on clothing/footwear/accessories in the UK grew by 0.4% whilst online expenditure 
grew by 14.1%. Market data demonstrated a high degree of volatility throughout 
2013 as evidenced by the BRC-KPMG Retail Sales Monitor. High street footfall 
remained under pressure as illustrated in figure 2 which in particular highlights  
the snow in January and prolonged cold snap in March. Shop vacancy rates 
remained high (estimated to be at 14.1% by the Local Data Company in June  
2013), driven by a number of high profile exits. These factors, as well as the very 
cold spring, meant that the market remained highly competitive with discounts  
at elevated levels throughout 2013. This is evidenced by the BRC-Nielsen Shop  
Price Index (figure 3) which shows deflation in the clothing and footwear sector  
for the entire period, accelerating in the final months of the year as retailers sought 
to clear stock that remained unsold due to the cold spring. The deflation of  
9.7% in July 2013 was the deepest since the series commenced in December 2006.

How did those trends affect Debenhams?

Debenhams continued to take advantage of the shift into multi-channel shopping 
and our online sales grew well ahead of the market. We are making our stores 
more compelling places to shop through the modernisation programme, 
improving store standards and services and enhancing their role as a key channel 
in the multi-channel environment. We adjusted our promotional strategy in line 
with the highly competitive sector which impacted gross margin in the first half.

How did the adverse weather influence Debenhams’ sales?

We were affected by adverse weather in two ways during the year. First, in the  
last two weeks of January widespread snowfall across the UK impacted the ability 
of customers to visit our stores. As this is a key trading period for Debenhams, 
coinciding with the final weeks of the important post-Christmas sale period,  
it resulted in a significant reduction in sales volumes. We were unable to recover  
all of those lost sales during February which impacted the profitability of the  
UK segment, and in turn the Group, during the first half of the year. In addition,  
the coldest spring weather for 50 years resulted in depressed demand for  
spring/summer clothing in the UK, leading to highly volatile sales patterns, 
especially during March and April. This volatility is illustrated in figure 4 which  
plots our weekly like-for-like sales change against the average UK temperature 
compared to the prior year during March, April and May.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5

Debenhams continued  
to take advantage of the 
shift into multi-channel 
shopping and our online 
sales grew well ahead  
of the market.

How are the economies in your international markets performing?

With activities in 28 different international markets, it is not surprising that we  
have seen a range of economic conditions. In the countries where we own stores, 
the Danish economy has shown signs of resilience whilst the Republic of Ireland 
remains weak.

In terms of our most important franchise market, the Middle East, there has been  
a narrowing in the economic performance of oil exporters and oil importers as  
the growth in the former moderates and the latter experience a modest recovery.  
The Cypriot banking system has recovered from the crisis seen in the spring  
of 2013, although we continue to monitor the performance of our franchise  
stores in Cyprus closely.

Independent market analysis

The changing nature of retail – Maureen Hinton, Research & Analysis Director, Verdict Research 

Retail is entering a new era. Because of technology, the living 
room is becoming our favourite shopping location rather  
than the high street. The ease of shopping from our sofas,  
using our mobile devices, has replaced the need to visit shops. 
That said, physical stores still have a place in our shopping 
habits, albeit a different one from the past. 

Technology, firstly through the internet, and now via the 
usability of tablets, has completely changed the way we shop. 
The combination of online researching, ordering and buying 
has become an integral part of how we purchase items now. 
The outcome of this changing technology is that the power  
has shifted from retailers to consumers; we live in a demand-led 
environment rather than the traditional supply-led one where  
a retailer only had to open another shop to increase its sales.

Crucially online shopping means shoppers are able  
to compare products and prices quickly and easily, therefore 
the importance of product relevance and differentiation has 
become even more vital. Having a completely integrated 
omni-channel operation, with fast delivery and outstanding 
customer service, is meaningless unless you have products 
people want to buy.

Furthermore, despite the signs of economic recovery, 
household budgets will continue to be squeezed as earnings 
lag behind price inflation for at least another couple of years. 
The result is that consumers will carry on being cautious with 
their spending and will be looking for value at all price levels. 
Therefore the pressure is even greater for retailers to offer 
products that will entice customers to spend.

Meanwhile the website is increasingly becoming the first point 
of contact a retailer has with its customers and there is very  
little time to make an impact on those visitors. It must appeal 
instantly, be fast, easy to navigate and relevant, to keep 
potential customers on site and convert them into buyers.

The result is even greater pressure on retailers. Apart from the 
demand for unique products, they have to adapt to a far more 
complex distribution model to satisfy customers’ delivery and 
service requirements and retailers are no longer competing  
on a national level – they face global competition.

Despite the shift online (and we at Verdict expect online sales  
to be worth £50 billion by 2018) physical stores are still an asset 
but the nature of those stores is changing. Local convenience 
stores have been given a boost by becoming collection points 
for other retailers’ products ordered online, while the growing 
attraction of click and collect as the preferred delivery/return 
option has given a boost to online sales and gets consumers 
into stores to pick up products. 

But for the large multiples, having a store in every conurbation 
to pull in maximum footfall is no longer necessary, or profitable. 
Instead retailers are creating flagship hubs that showcase 
products and provide a customer experience that fulfils more 
than a shopping need; they also entertain. These are aligned 
with smaller concepts, which are just as likely to be affiliates,  
for collection and ordering points. 

So while technology is making it easier for the consumer,  
for retailers life will continue to be challenging.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 6

Market overview continued

Suzanne Harlow, Group Trading 
Director, and Ross Clemmow,  
Director – eCommerce, discuss our 
market share performance offline  
and online during 2013 and the  
ways in which what we sell and  
how we sell it are becoming 
increasingly co-dependent. 

Where did you see the strongest market share growth 
during 2013?

How is the availability of other channels influencing  
how you stock your stores?

Suzanne: We gained market share in all our key categories. 
Total clothing/footwear/accessories share increased by 20 
basis points to 4.9% and included growth in womenswear  
(up 10 basis points to 5.3%) and menswear (up 60 basis points 
to 5.0%). Childrenswear share was flat at 3.1% but we started  
to see positive momentum in the last months of the year.  
In non-clothing categories, we continue to consolidate  
our strong market position in premium beauty. Our share  
of the homewares market grew, as did our furniture share.

How did your online market share growth compare  
with your overall performance?

Ross: Across the board, our online market share grew ahead 
of our total share. For example our total clothing/footwear/
accessories online share increased by 70 basis points to  
3.6%, with womenswear up 80 basis points to 3.9% and 
menswear up 60 basis points to 2.9%. Childrenswear online 
share is already ahead of our total share in this category and 
gained 10 basis points to 3.8% in 2013. We are very pleased 
with this performance and it demonstrates the significant 
opportunity for sales growth from closing the gap between 
total share and online share.

How did Debenhams’ online performance compare  
with the market?

Ross: Our online sales grew by 46.2%, more than three  
times faster than the overall market which grew by 14.1%. 
Online sales as a percentage of our total sales increased  
from 9.3% in 2012 to 13.2% in 2013. 

What are the main product areas where online  
is creating a real opportunity for Debenhams?

Suzanne: There are opportunities in all product categories, 
including those in which we already have a successful instore 
business and others where online provides a conduit for 
category extension. A good example is how online has 
revolutionised our ability to sell furniture. Our stores are 
generally too small to have anything but a token offer but 
online, supplemented by the home catalogue which we 
introduced in 2011, has led to our furniture sales more than 
doubling over the past three years. In clothing, online is 
allowing us to consolidate our strong position in areas such  
as occasionwear dresses and to meet demand for peripheral 
sizes in men’s big and tall suits and in lingerie where some 
products may come in up to 48 size options. It also makes 
international brands which have only limited store presence 
available to all customers. Examples include beauty brands 
such as MAC and footwear brands such as Clarks.

Suzanne: We are following the trend of how customers are 
choosing to shop areas such as homeware. Online penetration 
of homeware is one of the fastest growing categories in the 
market as customers take advantage of the convenience  
of having heavy or bulky items delivered to home. So we  
are reducing the space we give to homeware in store and 
increasing our offer online so it is now some 40% larger  
than the store offer. 

Why is a wide choice online so important?

Ross: Whilst customers know that the instore offer is limited 
by the physical size of their local store, they expect online  
to have elastic walls. We need a wide choice to meet this 
expectation. But choice is also important because it drives 
natural search, thereby reducing the reliance on paid search 
and lowering the cost of customer acquisition. This is one  
of the ways we are seeking to improve the economics of our 
online business (you can read more about this on page 9).  
Our online choice is a third larger than that in our biggest 
store and five times larger than a small store.

What were the key multi-channel trends in 2013?

Ross: In terms of channel, 2013 was all about mobile and  
in particular tablets. In 2013 we saw a 5% increase in visits  
and 7% increase in sales through desktops whilst for tablets 
these were 205% and 238% respectively. Overall, tablets 
accounted for 19% of online sales in 2013 compared with  
just 7% in the prior year. 

What should we be looking out for in 2014?

Suzanne: Having a unique and differentiated product  
offer will be more important than ever to give customers  
a compelling reason to shop with us and to reduce our 
exposure to online price comparison. We will therefore 
continue to focus on developing our core and designer  
own brands. As part of this we are investing in sourcing  
to reduce lead times, increase efficiency and improve  
both pricing and quality. 

Ross: As Maureen Hinton from Verdict suggests in her 
commentary on page 5, the digital channel shift will clearly 
continue. We are ready to take advantage of this. Mobile will 
continue to be very important, powered by growth in tablet 
usage. We may even see a slowing of smartphone growth. 
The work we are doing to create a single customer view will 
start to allow us to communicate with customers in a tailored 
way and to offer them specific incentives that match their 
purchasing habits. A wider range of delivery options will  
be available in time for peak trading and we will be continuing 
to develop a single view of stock to improve availability and 
widen delivery options further.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 20137

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
y

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 20138

Chief Executive’s strategic review
An interview with Michael Sharp

Michael Sharp talks about 
how we performed during 
2013, the key challenges  
we are facing, how we  
are addressing those 
challenges through our 
strategy to build a leading 
international, multi-channel 
brand and how we are 
ensuring the long-term 
viability of our business.

Can you summarise your strategy for Debenhams?

Our strategic goal is to create sustainable value through building a leading 
international, multi-channel brand. There are four pillars to this strategy:  
(1) focusing on UK retail, (2) delivering a compelling customer proposition,  
(3) increasing choice and availability through multi-channel and (4) expanding  
the brand internationally. I first articulated this strategy when I became Chief 
Executive in the autumn of 2011 and we are focused relentlessly on its execution.

What were your highs and lows of Debenhams’ performance in 2013?

I believe we made some solid progress in 2013 against the backdrop of  
a very tough environment characterised by weak consumer sentiment, a highly 
competitive marketplace and unhelpful weather conditions. We were clearly 
disappointed and frustrated by the impact of widespread snow during the  
crucial January sale period on our profitability in the first half of the year but  
I believe we did everything we could to mitigate its effect.

I was particularly pleased by our market share performance during the year.  
We gained share in key product categories and saw good growth in areas which 
we had particularly targeted for share growth, such as footwear where we gained 
share in women’s, men’s and children’s shoes.

Our multi-channel business continued to grow well ahead of the market with 
online sales up 46.2% compared with market growth of 14.1%. We are on track  
to meet our medium-term online sales target of £600 million.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 20139

Retail in the UK is 
undergoing a profound 
change due to the channel 
shift between stores and 
online. We are addressing 
this challenge through the 
four pillars of our strategy.

What are the key challenges you are facing in 2014 and beyond? 

Retail in the UK is undergoing a profound change due to the channel shift 
between stores and online. The resultant decline in store footfall in addition  
to cost inflation means that store costs are growing faster than store sales, putting 
store profitability under pressure. The four pillars of our strategy are helping us to 
meet this challenge. By focusing on UK retail in the first pillar, we are managing 
store costs very closely and making prudent investment in core stores through the 
store modernisation programme. By driving sales and improving the economics  
of our multi-channel business in the third pillar, we are seeking to fill the gap  
in store profitability by building on our strong multi-channel credentials.  
Growth in profitability will come through expanding the brand internationally 
which is the focus of the fourth pillar of the strategy.

What are you doing to address declining store profitability in the UK?

We are undertaking a number of initiatives. These include the own brand sales 
density trials in key womenswear brands Red Herring and Principles by Ben de Lisi 
as well as women’s footwear which have shown some useful results in their first 
season and have therefore been continued into autumn/winter 2013. We are also 
reconfiguring stores for multi-channel through, for example, enhanced Click & 
Collect facilities. The model store programme to improve store standards is now 
well established and we are seeing results in terms of better product presentation 
and visual merchandising.

The current store modernisation programme commenced in summer 2010.  
Since then, 44 stores have been upgraded, including 12 in 2013. Our thorough 
planning and execution process results in modernisations delivering a strong  
IRR of c.15% with a sales uplift of c.6.0% in the first year post-modernisation. 

Looking further ahead, we are conducting an estate-wide space review to ensure 
all space in being used in the most profitable way.

Why do you believe it is right to open new stores in the UK given the  
channel shift?

Stores are an important part of our ability to meet customers’ demands for 
multi-channel shopping and will remain our largest single sales channel for the 
foreseeable future. Our contracted store pipeline currently stands at 16 stores  
with four opening in each of the next four financial years. New stores have shorter 
lease lengths than existing stores, many with break clauses and capped rent 
reviews. They are configured for multi-channel services such as Click & Collect  
and at the same time emphasis is placed on hospitality and other services which 
cannot be replicated online to drive footfall. We know that there is a strong 
correlation between the opening of a new store and online sales in a particular 
area. You can read more about our experience in Chesterfield on page 19. 

Let’s not forget that we have a track record of delivering strong financial returns 
from new stores. The 37 stores opened in the past seven years have generated  
a return on investment averaging c.40%.

How can you improve the economics of your multi-channel business?

The two main costs associated with multi-channel are customer acquisition and 
fulfilment. The first is principally around search. We have done a great deal of  
work to optimise paid search and measure the return on the words and phrases 
that we buy. We are now turning our attention to optimising natural search which 
can reduce the cost of customer acquisition significantly. Taking advantage of  
the growth in shopping through mobile devices is also an important tool to lower 
costs, particularly through apps which allow for communication through push 
notifications. Fulfilment principally comprises picking, packing, despatch and 
delivery. In the past year we have brought all fulfilment of all own bought products 
in-house through our two national distribution centres. We will see increased 
efficiency in fulfilment as we grow online sales towards our medium-term target  
of £600 million. We are also making changes to our delivery options which will 
enable us to recover a higher proportion of our fulfilment costs through offering 
next day delivery for a premium fee and raising the threshold for free standard 
delivery. The changes will be fully operational in time for Christmas 2013.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 10

Chief Executive’s strategic review continued 

Transforming Oxford Street 
The transformation of our Oxford  
Street store in central London into  
our international flagship is proceeding 
to plan. The entire store is being 
modernised, inside and out, including 
an innovative architectural facade and 
the addition of a new seventh floor of 
trading space. Working with leading 
retail design consultancy Dalziel & Pow, 
we are creating a store which redefines 
Debenhams in Oxford Street and 
beyond. We are building on our brand 
strengths and strong customer base  
to create a vibrant and relevant concept 
which brings personality, fashionability 
and quality to the shopping experience.

The interior will be completed  
in time for peak trading in 2013.  
A phased reveal of the facade 
commenced in September 2013  
and will be completed in the spring 
of 2014.

You have been quoted in the past as saying that product is the lifeblood  
of your business. What new initiatives are you undertaking to ensure your 
product offer meets your customers’ expectations?

Our proposition is more relevant today than it ever has been and we are redefining 
the department store to meet the changing behaviour of today’s consumers.  
Our product offer is unique through its combination of credible own brands 
(including Designers at Debenhams), international brands and concessions.  
It is differentiated by our multi-category and multi-brand approach which sees 
each brand clearly targeting a defined customer group or end use. And it is 
exclusive through our core and designer own brands which account for some  
50% of everything we sell. These characteristics will continue to inform our  
product and brand strategy.

Designers at Debenhams lies at the heart of our own brand offer. New designers 
include our first new menswear designer for ten years Patrick Grant, Todd Lynn  
in womenswear and Stephen Jones in women’s accessories.

What form do you expect international expansion to take?

We use a different approach for different international markets – owned stores, 
franchise stores and online – which provides flexibility and matches our appetite 
for risk. We have owned businesses in Denmark and the Republic of Ireland which 
are a key part of our international division but I do not envisage opening owned 
stores in any other countries at this time. The majority of international growth will 
come from franchise stores and online which are lower cost, lower risk routes to 
take advantage of the demand we see from international customers. Our target 
for franchise stores is 150 in five years’ time. There are 24 stores in the pipeline, 
starting with seven in 2014. New markets are likely to be those with a growing 
mid-market demographic where the department store market is under-
represented. We are also seeing very strong growth in our international online 
activities, albeit from a low base.

You employ thousands of people directly in the UK and internationally  
with many thousands more working in your supply chain and franchise  
stores. What are you doing to ensure their wellbeing?

We fully recognise the importance of our people to the success of our business 
and how vital it is to attract, retain and develop the very best talent in the  
industry. We are committed to ensuring the wellbeing of everyone connected  
with Debenhams. We want to make Debenhams a great place to work and to  
this end undertook our first ever employee engagement survey in the UK and Irish 
businesses during 2013 which all employees in our stores and head office were 
invited to take part in. The findings were extremely interesting and have influenced 
our thinking in a number of important areas. The survey will be repeated annually 
and its results have been adopted as a KPI of the Group (see page 33). 

As members of the Ethical Trading Initiative since 2001, Debenhams has been 
working for many years to ensure those who work in our supply chain are treated 
fairly, with respect and dignity, and work in a safe environment. We shared the 
widely felt shock and horror of the Rana Plaza incident in Bangladesh on 24 April 
2013. Debenhams did not source from that facility but we, along with many  
other retailers, have become a signatory to the accord agreement to help  
prevent another tragedy. The accord, which has been written by the European 
trade union IndustriALL, creates a unified retail collaboration to develop and 
implement a way to assess building and fire safety. The agreement binds all 
signatories to approach the way in which they assess factories in a new, positive 
light. The accord also sets a precedent for retailers to support a factory and  
its employees in the event it is deemed unsafe. The signatories also support 
unionisation of the factories by IndustriALL, continuing to support collaborative 
bargaining and freedom of association. It has been our long-standing practice  
that all our suppliers must adhere to our Supplier Code of Conduct and we 
conduct a full programme of monitoring, including auditing, and conduct  
regular unannounced factory visits across our supply chain.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201311

Celebrating 200 years 
In December 1813, William Debenham 
invested in a drapery business run  
by William Clark to form Clark & 
Debenham. We will be celebrating  
the bicentenary of the Debenhams 
name appearing on the British  
high street in many ways over  
the coming year.

Read more about our KPIs 
P32-33

Debenhams will celebrate its 200th anniversary in the 2014 financial year. 
What do you need to do to ensure the long-term viability of the business?

Debenhams has prospered for the last 200 years by putting customers at the  
heart of everything we do and adapting to their changing needs and the wider 
market environment. Through our strategy, we are evolving from an operator of 
UK department stores to an international, multi-channel brand which can deliver 
sustainable value over the long-term. Supporting the four pillars of our strategy, 
and key to this evolution, are what I refer to as three enablers: people, supply chain 
and systems. I have already talked about how important our people are to us. 
Supply chain connects the business to its customers and includes sourcing and 
logistics. In terms of sourcing, we are working to improve speed to market and  
to become both more flexible and more efficient. We are changing our logistics 
activities to meet the needs of an international, multi-channel business and its 
customers, for example widening the range of delivery options available to online 
customers in the UK and shipping product direct from suppliers in China to our 
largest franchise partners. We are investing in our systems capabilities across the 
four pillars. I would highlight in particular the work we are undertaking to give  
us a single view of the customer which will give us a deeper understanding of our 
customers’ behaviour and allow us to use that understanding to give customers  
a more personalised and relevant experience. Successful execution of the four 
pillars and the three enablers are therefore key to ensuring Debenhams’  
long-term success.

What is your outlook for the year ahead?

We continue to deliver growth and additional customer benefits through our 
strong multi-channel capabilities. At the same time, we are working hard to ensure 
our UK stores adapt to the challenge of their changing role in a multi-channel world.

Looking ahead, we remain confident in our strategy and are excited about the 
upcoming November relaunch of our global flagship store on Oxford Street which 
coincides with the celebration of Debenhams’ 200th anniversary.

More widely, whilst consumer confidence may be showing signs of improvement, 
we expect that household incomes will remain under pressure from inflation 
growing ahead of wage increases. We therefore remain cautious about the 
strength and pace of any consumer recovery in 2014 and expect the marketplace 
to remain highly competitive.

Michael Sharp
Chief Executive

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 12

Business model 
Understanding our approach to business

Who is our customer
A family department store with something  
for everyone
We put our customers at the heart of everything we do.  
We are a family department store that operates at the  
heart of the community. Our customer base reflects our  
family orientation, spanning a broad range of age groups  
and demographics in line with the markets in which we  
operate. Our breadth of appeal is a key strength.

Customer profile 
by age

Customer profile 
by demographic

Age group 
18-24 
25-34 
35-44 
45-54 
55-64 
65+ 

Demographic 
AB 
C1 
C2 
DE 

%
33
32
22
13

%
12
22
21
18
13
14

What we sell 
A unique, differentiated  
and exclusive proposition
Our proposition is unique through its combination of own  
brands, designer brands, international brands and concessions.  
It is differentiated through being both multi-brand and multi-
category, with each brand clearly targeting a defined customer  
or end use. And it is exclusive through our core and designer  
own brands which account for nearly half of everything we sell. 
Our offer also provides balance and resilience through its  
50/50 mix of clothing and non-clothing sales.

Sales by brand type

Sales by category

Brand type 
%
Core own brands  28.4
Designer own brands 16.9
International brands 31.4
Concession/
consignment 

23.3

%
Category 
17.4
Womenswear  
13.5
Menswear 
9.4
Childrenswear 
6.3
Lingerie 
14.0
Accessories 
Beauty 
23.3
Home & furniture  12.0
3.3
Food services 
0.8
Other 

Governance

Good governance is about 
responsible and effective 
management, demonstrating 
honesty, transparency and 
accountability.

Read more P55

r

ho is our custo m e

W

Focusing
on UK retail

Sustainable 
value

Expanding
the brand
internationally

W

h

a

t 

w

e s

ell

KPIs

The board assesses the performance  
of the business on a range of financial,  
strategic and sustainability key 
performance indicators. 

Read more P32

H

o

w

w

e

b

u

y

Delivering

a compelling

customer

proposition

Increasing

availability and

choice through

multi-channel

H ow we sell

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
 
r

ho is our custo m e

W

Focusing

on UK retail

Expanding

the brand

internationally

W

h

a

t 

w

e s

ell

Sustainable 

value

13

A sustainable business 

Sustainability is embedded into 
everyone’s role. We have a deep 
understanding of the benefits of 
adopting sustainability measures.

H

o

w

w

e

b

u

y

Delivering
a compelling
customer
proposition

Increasing
availability and
choice through
multi-channel

H ow we sell

Remuneration 

We are committed to a remuneration 
policy that contributes to the  
continuing success of  
our long-term strategy.

Read more P67

How we buy 
A diverse supply chain 
Our sourcing strategy is based on “right product, right country”.  
Our many years of direct sourcing have resulted in long-standing 
relationships with suppliers around the world. This helps us to  
meet our customers’ expectations that every one of our products  
is manufactured in a factory that is socially ethical and quality  
assurance compliant.

Own brand sourcing
by country

Own brand direct 
vs indirect sourcing

Direct 
Indirect 

%
67
33

Country 
China/Hong Kong 
India 
Bangladesh 
Vietnam 
Romania 
Turkey 
Other 

%
47
12
10
6
5
5
15

How we sell 
Giving customers more ways to browse, 
discover and buy
We are meeting the expectations of our customers around the world  
for more ways to shop. Stores will remain the largest sales channel for  
the foreseeable future and the Debenhams brand currently trades through  
238 stores in 29 countries. Non-store sales channels are growing quickly  
and accounted for 13.2% of GTV in 2013. These include online, mobile, 
catalogues and telephone ordering. An increasing number of customers  
are enjoying a multi-channel shopping experience through which a single 
purchase uses two or more channels.

Sales by segment

Store numbers

UK 
International –(cid:31)Denmark 
International –(cid:31)Ireland 
International –(cid:31)franchises 

Sales by channel

No
156
6
11
65

Channel 
Store (UK and  
international) 
Online (UK and 
international) 

£m 
2,410.5 

%
86.8

 366.3 

13.2

Sales by channel trend

2013

2012

2011

86.8%

13.2%

90.7%

93.2%

9.3%

6.8%

Instore

Online

UK  
International 

%
81
19

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report  
 
 
 
 
 
 
14

Strategy at a glance 
Building a leading international,  
multi-channel brand 

Focusing on UK retail

Strategic priorities 
•  Addressing the challenge  

of lower footfall

Challenges in delivering 
•  Highly competitive marketplace, 
weak consumer environment

•  Continued investment  
in store modernisations

•  Declining high street footfall  
due to channel shift to online

•  Opening new stores to grow 

•  Ongoing inflation in store costs 

sales and market share

Performance 2013
•  UK like-for-like sales  

under pressure in highly 
competitive market

•  12 stores modernised

•  Transformation of Oxford  
Street into international  
flagship on plan

•  Model store programme  

to improve instore standards  
now well established

•  New stores in Chesterfield  

and Lichfield, adding  
75,000 sq ft of new space

•  New store pipeline stands  
at 16 over next four years

•  Limited availability of sites  

for new stores

 Sustainability in action 
•  Store waste reduced by 200 

tonnes, 91% diverted from landfill

•  New building management  

system providing better data  
on electricity usage

•  Increasing use of rail transport 
from distribution centres (DCs)  
to Scottish stores; 20% of inbound 
freight containers now shipped  
to Sherburn DC by rail

•  All faulty/damaged products 
collected by charity partner  
for repair and resale

•  Store charitable work now 
consolidated into the  
Debenhams Foundation

Expanding the brand 
internationally

Strategic priorities 
•  Increasing the number of 

Challenges in delivering 
•  Essential to have right franchise 

international franchise stores

partner in each market

•  Growing sales from owned 

international assets

•  Expansion of international online

•  Successfully managed Cypriot 
banking crisis but ongoing 
monitoring of performance 

Performance 2013
•  Six new franchise stores  

opened in year, including  
two new markets, and  
12 stores closed 

•  Good performance from 
Magasin du Nord with 
like-for-like sales up 7.2% in 
DKK, 6.0% in GBP

•  Magasin website operational 

since September 2012

•  International online growing 
quickly from a small base, 
delivering to 66 countries  
outside the UK

•  Awarded “International Growth 
Initiative of the Year” for overall 
international expansion 

•  Republic of Ireland market 

continues to be a challenge 

•  How to gain momentum  

for online in markets where  
we have no store presence 

Sustainability in action
•  Overseas distribution hub  
in Singapore now fully  
operational, generating cost 
savings, lower emissions,  
better working capital usage  
and freeing up capacity in  
the UK DCs 

•  Strong response rate from 
employees in Republic  
of Ireland in employee 
engagement survey

Focusing
on UK retail

Delivering

a compelling

customer

proposition

Sustainable 
value

Expanding
the brand
internationally

Increasing

availability and

choice through

multi-channel

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201315

Focusing

on UK retail

Delivering
a compelling
customer
proposition

Sustainable 

value

Expanding

the brand

internationally

Increasing
availability and
choice through
multi-channel

Delivering a compelling 
customer proposition

Strategic priorities 
•  Developing our brand  
and product strategy

•  Communicating the proposition 
under our “Life Made Fabulous” 
campaign to drive sales and 
improve brand perception

Performance 2013
•  Market share growth  

in key product categories

•  Sales density trials in  
womenswear showed  
useful results 

Challenges in delivering 
•  Safeguarding sustainability  

of supply chain including need  
for more flexibility and shorter  
time to market

•  Ongoing cost price inflation  

due to higher labour rates in Asia

•  Ensuring effectiveness of brand 
and marketing programmes

Sustainability in action
•  New third party supplier 

monitoring partners appointed

•  Signatory to Bangladesh  

•  New Designers at Debenhams 

accord (read more on page 10)

include Stephen Jones,  
Patrick Grant and Todd Lynn

•  First Christmas brand advertising 

campaign for six years

•  Ethical compliance team 

strengthened in UK, Hong Kong 
and Bangladesh

•  Bangladesh sourcing  

•  Brand awareness at all time high

office opened

•  Single customer view launched  
to enable more personalised 
communication

•  Increase in number of 

unannounced factory visits

Increasing availability and choice  
through multi-channel

Strategic priorities 
•  More choice, made easy  
to choose and easy to get

•  More ways to browse,  

discover and buy

•  Shopping experiences that 
recognise, reward and put 
customers in control

Performance 2013
•  Strong growth in online sales,  
up 46.2%, representing 13.2%  
of total sales

•  Online market share up 70bps  

to 3.6%

•  Visitors up 36% to 241 million

•  Sales from mobile devices  

up over 200%

•  All own bought fulfilment  

brought in-house

Challenges in delivering 
•  Recovering higher proportion  

of fulfilment costs 

•  Optimising natural search  
to reduce cost of customer 
acquisition

•  Offering enhanced range  

of delivery options

•  Providing additional  
payment methods 

Sustainability in action 
•  Number of parcels per order 
reduced as all own bought 
fulfilment in-house, reducing 
parcel miles and delivery costs

•  Increasing number of Click  
& Collect parcels are being 
transported to stores on our  
own fleet, reducing parcel  
miles for each delivery

•  270bps reduction in UK online 

costs as percentage of sales due to 
scale and efficiency improvements

•  Working to reduce  

amount of packaging  
used in online fulfilment

•  Awarded “Retail Technology 
Initiative of the Year” for  
Endless Aisle 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 16

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201317

Focusing on  
UK retail...

Our stores in the UK will remain our largest single sales channel for  
the foreseeable future although their role is changing. We are investing  
in the modernisation of older stores and building new stores in target 
markets where we can deliver an acceptable level of return. The case  
for new stores is clearly demonstrated by our experience in Chesterfield,  
one of two new stores opened during 2013.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201318

Strategy in action

...The case  
for stores

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201319

Stores are central to our strategy but  
their role is changing. They are not only  
a physical point of sale for products which 
customers want to see, touch and feel. 
They are also a collection and return point 
for multi-channel orders and they unlock 
sales in multi-channel catchments. 

We are investing in our stores to support 
multi-channel growth through new instore 
ordering points which focus on self-service 
and access to choice and giving our Click 
& Collect facilities a stronger presence, 
with new collection points and new 
branding for increased visibility. 

The case for opening new stores is 
demonstrated by Chesterfield which 
trades from 45,000 sq ft on a retail park 
and opened in September 2012. It is  
a store that is fully configured to operate  
in a multi-channel environment. 

In Chesterfield’s first year we have seen 
sales in the local area more than triple.  
The store itself has contributed the largest 
portion of this growth. Importantly, other 
stores where our Chesterfield customers 
may have shopped prior to opening have 
seen only a limited amount of deflection, 
suggesting that the overwhelming majority 
of store sales have been incremental.  

We have also seen online sales in  
the Chesterfield area double, which 
demonstrates the close correlation 
between store sales and online sales.

We are scheduled to open 16 new  
stores in the UK during the next four  
years, starting with four in 2014. Many  
of these are located on retail parks, just like 
Chesterfield. Lease lengths on these new 
stores are generally shorter than we would 
have signed in the past and those on retail 
parks usually have a break clause. These 
variations ensure we have sufficient 
flexibility to meet the changing role  
of stores in a multi-channel world. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201320

Delivering  
a compelling 
customer 
proposition...

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201321

A key feature of our offer is the balance and resilience provided  
by a 50/50 split of sales between clothing and non-clothing 
categories. Non-clothing includes footwear, handbags, swimwear, 
men’s accessories, homeware, furniture and our strong premium 
beauty offer which encompasses some of the world’s leading 
brands. Like our clothing ranges, we offer customers a broad choice 
of own core brands, Designers at Debenhams, international brands 
and concessions across a good/better/best price architecture. 
Non-clothing is an area ideally suited to large space retailers  
like Debenhams and is also seeing very strong growth online. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201322

Strategy in action

...Putting our 
best foot forward 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201323

One of the non-clothing categories which 
we are targeting for growth is footwear. 
We saw good traction during 2013 with  
our market share of women’s, men’s and 
children’s footwear up 10bps, 40bps and 
30 bps respectively. 

There is plenty more to do and our 
ambition is to double our footwear share 
over the next five years by closing the gap 
between our footwear share of 2.6% and 
our clothing market share of 5.5%. 

Our shoe offer has been transformed  
in recent years as we have developed  
own brand ranges. In particular we have 
expanded our Designers at Debenhams 
shoe choice, especially for women, as we 
seek to emulate the success that many  
of the luxury brands have achieved in 
accessories. We have also seen good 
results from the Faith brand which was 
acquired out of administration in 2010. 

New third party brands have also been 
added to our offer, including the UK’s 
leading shoe brand Clarks.

Footwear is a category that sells extremely 
well online, accounting for nearly 25% of  
all UK footwear sales (source: BRC-KPMG 
Online Retail Sales Monitor, August 2013). 
Our online footwear share increased by 
100 basis points to 3.3% in 2013 and 32%  
of our total own bought footwear sales  
are now online. Footwear is a great 
example of how online is enabling us  
to widen our product and price ranges  
for all customers.

Our marketing campaign has been 
strengthened to support footwear more 
overtly – including a dedicated shoe and 
bag brochure for each new season.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201324

Increasing 
availability and 
choice through  
multi-channel...

Our multi-channel strategy is predicated on “following the customer”. Customers are 
firmly in control of the way they want to shop. We can’t wrest that control from them so  
we must develop the most profitable way to provide the products and services they want. 
Fortunately we are very well positioned to take advantage of the growth of multi-channel 
because of who we are: our width of choice, our exclusive brands and the role all our 
channels can play – including our stores – in following the customer.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201325

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201326

Debenhams plc

Annual Report and Accounts 2013

Strategy in action

...The rise  
of mobile

27

Debenhams plc

Our customers are increasingly “mobile”. 
In 2013, 40% of our 241 million online visits 
came through tablets, smartphones and 
the instore ordering kiosks and these 
devices accounted for 25% of our £366 
million online sales. Much of this growth 
came from tablets where visits increased 
by over 200%. Tablet customers also 
spend more, with the highest average 
order value of all channels. We have 
developed specific content for each 
mobile channel which reflects the part  
of the shopping journey customers use 
them for most.

Mobile is also important because it is more 
than just a direct sales channel. It can have 
a significant influence on sales through 
other channels, especially stores. Industry 
analysis suggests that for every £1 spent 
on mobile, a spend of a further £10 will  
be influenced instore. We help customers 
to use their mobile devices by providing 
free wi-fi in all our stores.

We actively encourage our mobile 
customers to engage with us through our 
suite of apps which have been downloaded 
more than 6 million times. We have won  
a number of awards for them and they 
have an average customer rating of 4 stars. 
Apps are important not only as a tool to 

make shopping easier but they can also 
reduce the cost of customer acquisition 
through the use of push notifications.

Looking forward, there are many ways that 
mobile will enhance our multi-channel 
offer even further. It has an important part 
to play in our planned developments for 
Click & Collect, for example by allowing 
customers to “check in” when they arrive  
in store to collect their parcel so we can 
have it ready for them.

Annual Report and Accounts 201328

Expanding  
the brand 
internationally...

The magnitude of the international department store market makes 
expansion outside the UK an attractive proposition for Debenhams 
and therefore an important strategic aim. We use a different approach 
for different markets, including franchise stores and international online 
sales. We also own stores in the Republic of Ireland and in Denmark 
through the country’s leading department store chain Magasin du 
Nord which we acquired in November 2009.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201330

Debenhams plc

Annual Report and Accounts 2013

Strategy in action

...Magasin  
du Nord

31

Debenhams plc

Annual Report and Accounts 2013

Magasin du Nord is a long established, 
well known brand in Denmark with strong 
customer awareness. Although it has a 
different customer base and product offer 
compared to our UK business, Magasin 
has benefited from leveraging the Group’s 
expertise and experience in a number  
of important areas in the four years since 
acquisition, including sourcing, multi-
channel and logistics. The business is now 
very profitable, having been loss-making 
when acquired, and delivered another  
year of strong sales growth in 2013. 

Looking forward, we can grow sales and 
margins by introducing more Debenhams 
brands and developing the Magasin own 
label. Whilst Magasin will always have  
a lower penetration of own brands than 
the UK due to its more premium market 
positioning, we anticipate we can double 
the own brand mix over the medium-term.

We are investing in the Magasin stores 
including a substantial makeover of the 
flagship store in Kongens Nytorv in central 
Copenhagen and upgrades to the Aarhus 
and Odense stores.

Magasin also has the opportunity  
to become the leading online retailer  
in Denmark and even elsewhere  
in Scandinavia. Its trading website,  
www.magasin.dk, was launched during  
the course of 2013 and is already showing 
encouraging signs. A mobile site and  
app will be available in time for Christmas 
2013. Multi-channel services such as click 
and collect are also under development.

32

Key performance indicators 
Measuring our progress

Key performance indicators 

Directors’ remuneration 

Strategic KPIs

The board uses a range of KPIs to assess 
performance. These include strategic  
KPIs which measure how we are meeting 
the goals for each pillar of our strategy. 
Financial KPIs measure the overall 
performance of the business and are 
aligned with those commonly used by 
shareholders. Sustainability KPIs recognise 
the importance of non-financial metrics  
to all our stakeholders.

Directors’ remuneration is aligned to  
a number of KPIs. Profit before tax and 
like-for-like sales are metrics for the annual 
bonus. EPS is a metric for the Performance 
Share Plan. Please see the directors’ 
remuneration report for details of all 
metrics related to executive remuneration.

Read more P67

Linked to executive remuneration

Focusing on UK retail –
number of UK stores

160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0

09 10 11 12 13

Definition
Opening new stores will continue to be  
a driver of sales growth as demonstrated 
by the example of our new Chesterfield 
store on page 19.

2013 performance
We opened new stores in Chesterfield  
and Lichfield taking the total to 156.

Looking forward 
The UK store pipeline comprises 16 stores, 
four of which will open in each of the next 
four financial years.

Financial KPIs  

Gross transaction  
value (£m)

Like-for-like sales  
change (%)

Profit before tax  
and exceptional items (£m)

Linked to executive 
remuneration

Linked to executive 
remuneration

3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0

2
1
0
-1
-2
-3
-4

160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

Definition 
Gross transaction value (GTV) is a measure 
of overall sales in the business, including 
those from concession brands.

2013 performance
Group GTV increased by 2.5% with  
growth in both the UK (2.3%) and 
International (3.7%) segments. 

Looking forward 
We expect GTV to continue to grow  
as we build a leading international, 
multi-channel brand.

Note: All numbers for 2011 on 52 week basis.

Definition 
Like-for-like (LFL) sales is a measure  
of the annual performance of stores  
that have been open for at least  
one year. 

2013 performance
Group LFL sales increased by  
2.0%, building on the 1.6% growth 
achieved last year.

Looking forward 
As in 2013, LFL sales will continue  
to be driven by online and  
international activities.

Definition 
Profit before tax and exceptional items  
is our principal measure of profitability. 

2013 performance
Profit before tax fell by 2.7%, largely due  
to the impact of poor weather in the UK 
during the first half as well a write-off 
related to closure of the Romanian 
franchise stores. 

Looking forward 
The board expects profit before tax  
to grow in the future.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201333

Strategic KPIs

Delivering a compelling  
customer proposition –
own bought sales mix (%)

Increasing availability and  
choice through multi-channel 
– online sales (£m)

Expanding the  
brand internationally –
international sales (£m)

80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0

400
350
300
250
200
150
100
50
0

600
500
400
300
200
100
0

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

Definition 
Own bought sales are a key component  
of our unique, differentiated and exclusive 
product offer, generating high margins.

2013 performance
Group own bought mix was flat at 76.7%. 
UK mix was 79.9% and International mix 
was 63.0%.

Looking forward 
Own bought mix will grow gradually  
over time as we continue to develop  
our own brands.

Definition 
Online sales are a good indicator of the 
performance of our fast-growing multi-
channel business. They include sales to 
customers in the UK and the 66 other 
countries to which we offer delivery.

2013 performance
Online sales increased by 46.2%  
to £366.3 million, 13.2% of total sales.

Looking forward 
Our medium-term target for online  
sales is £600 million.

Definition 
International sales comprise those from 
owned stores in Denmark and Ireland,  
the franchise stores and online orders 
delivered outside the UK.

2013 performance
International sales increased by 3.7%  
to £522.0 million, driven by growth in 
Denmark, the franchise stores and online.

Looking forward 
Sales growth will continue to be driven by 
Denmark, new franchise stores and online.

Earnings per share  
(EPS) (pence)

Linked to executive 
remuneration

12
10
8
6
4
2
0

Sustainability KPIs 

Carbon emissions  
(000 tonnes)

New

Employee engagement (%)

New

200
175
150
125
100
75
50
25
0

80
70
60
50
40
30
20
10
0

09 10 11 12 13

09 10 11 12 13

13

Definition 
Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the 
earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders 
by the weighted average number of ordinary 
shares outstanding during the financial 
year (excluding shares purchased by the 
Company and transferred to treasury). 

2013 performance
EPS increased by 4.1%, largely due  
to the share buyback scheme. 

Looking forward 
The board expects earnings per  
share to grow in the future.

Definition 
CO2e is used as a measure of our 
environmental impact. It takes into account 
harmful emissions from the six greenhouse 
gases identified by the Kyoto protocol. 

Definition 
During 2013 we conducted our first 
employee engagement survey, inviting all 
employees in our UK and Irish stores and 
head office to participate.

2013 performance
CO2e fell by 3.7% due in part to continued 
investment in energy reduction.

Looking forward 
We are aiming to continue reducing 
emissions. In 2014 the UK government  
is introducing mandatory greenhouse  
gas reporting.

2013 performance
77% of the employees who participated 
feel engaged working at Debenhams.  
This will form the base for future surveys.

Looking forward 
The survey will be repeated on an annual 
basis going forward.

Financial KPIs  

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 34

Innovation 
Leading the way in responsible retailing

Debenhams shows diversity is in fashion
We have broken convention by becoming the first high street 
retailer in the UK to promote our latest fashion collection using 
models in a diverse variety of ages, size and looks. 

The imagery features Kelly, who was born without her left 
forearm, Paralympian swimmer Stefanie Reid, size 18 model 
Jada, petite model Jess and a number of models aged over  
40 including Valerie aged 69. 

Fashion industry expert Caryn Franklin, who worked with us on 
the campaign, said: “I never underestimate the power of great 
clothes to bolster self-esteem or the impact of imagery that 
celebrates difference.”

Debenhams vows not to retouch  
model shots
As part of our long-standing commitment to encourage 
positive body image, we use only minimal digital retouching 
because we know that the use of some digital techniques  
to create unrealistic body shapes can make women and men 
feel insecure about their natural looks and size. During 2013 
we extended this commitment to our lingerie imagery and  
are now only using pictures which reflect the natural beauty  
of the models and help customers to feel confident about 
their own figures. 

The Debenhams Foundation
The Debenhams Foundation was launched in 2012 to give  
us a clear focus for the money Debenhams customers, 
employees, designers and suppliers raise for good causes.  
A registered charity, the Foundation supports the charity 
partners that were chosen after we consulted our customers 
about what mattered to them most. 

Since the launch of the Foundation, Debenhams has raised 
more than £1 million for Children in Need and the three  
breast cancer charities that sit under our “Think Pink“ initiative: 
Breakthrough Breast Cancer, Breast Cancer Campaign  
and Pink Ribbon Foundation. 

The first retailer to sign code  
of conduct for models
In May 2013, Debenhams became the first retailer to sign  
up to the Equity code for the fair treatment of models in all  
of our photo shoots, TV ads, PR imagery and photography  
for debenhams.com. The code provides assurances in  
relation to areas such as the maximum length of working 
hours, the provision of breaks and refreshments and the use  
of private changing areas. The move builds on our guidelines 
which ensure that no model under the age of 16 is used to 
represent an adult and that all female models must be at least 
a size 8. Model Dunja Knezevic who is Chair of Equity’s Models 
Committee said: “Debenhams is not only positively employing 
models who represent the body image more typical of 
women but they are treating models with the same care  
as a good employer.“ 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013i

F
n
a
n
c
i
a
l

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
y

r
e
v
i
e
w

OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsFinancial reviewStrategic report  
 
Chief Financial Officer’s report 
Investing to support the 
four pillars of the strategy

36

Our close and careful 
management of all aspects 
of the business produced 
a good set of results despite 
the highly competitive 
market environment.

Figure 1: Financial summary

Gross transaction value

UK

International

Group

Increase in Group like-for-like sales

Revenue

UK

International

Group

Operating profit

UK

International

Group

Net interest

Profit before tax

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

Dividend per share

52 weeks to 
31 August 
2013

52 weeks to  
1 September 
2012

£2,254.8m

£2,204.6m

£522.0m

£503.4m

£2,776.8m

£2,708.0m

+2.0%

+1.6%

£1,895.9m

£1,860.3m

£386.3m

£369.5m

£2,282.2m

£2,229.8m

£139.8m

£144.3m

£28.2m

£30.7m

£168.0m

£175.0m

£14.0m

£16.7m

£154.0m

£158.3m

10.2p

10.2p

3.4p

9.8p

9.8p

3.3p

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201337

We have a very clear order 
of priorities for capital 
allocation: to invest in the 
four pillars of the strategy; 
to pay a dividend to our 
shareholders; to reduce 
leverage over the medium-
term; and to return any 
surplus cash over and above 
this to shareholders through 
a share buyback scheme.

Can you summarise Debenhams’ performance in 2013?

Our performance is summarised in figure 1. Our close and careful management  
of all aspects of the business meant that in a challenging market we delivered 
gross transaction value of £2.8 billion, revenue of £2.3 billion, operating profit  
of £168.0 million, profit before tax of £154.0 million and earnings per share of 
10.2 pence. We consider this to be a solid performance in light of the highly 
competitive market environment which was also impacted by poor weather 
affecting the profitability of the UK and a write-off arising out of the closure  
of the Romanian franchise stores in the International business.

What do you see as the key areas for investment over the next few years? 

Investment will be targeted at supporting the four pillars of our strategy and the 
evolution of Debenhams from a UK department store operator to an international, 
multi-channel business.

Capital expenditure will continue to be invested behind the four pillars including 
the store modernisation programme and the 16 new UK stores scheduled to open 
during the next four years. We are also investing in systems across the business  
in particular to support our fast-growing multi-channel activities. Much of the 
revenue investment – primarily to support product development and our 
marketing activities – has been made now and our focus will be on achieving  
a return on this investment.

Why have you changed the way you guide on the cost base?

In the past we gave guidance for key cost categories as a percentage of Group 
sales. This was useful when the business was principally a UK store model. 
However, with the growth of sales from multi-channel and international operations, 
this guidance became less useful. Starting at the interim results in April 2013, we 
now provide guidance by geographic segment and, within each segment, break 
the analysis down into store costs, online costs and other costs as appropriate. 

There has been a lot of commentary about the change to IAS 19.  
Can you explain what this accounting standard does and how the change  
will impact Debenhams?

In 2013, Debenhams benefited from a pension credit of £11.3 million under IAS 19 
“Employee Benefits“ (2012: £11.7 million). The purpose of this accounting standard 
is to put a notional impact of a defined benefit pension scheme onto the profit  
and loss account. From our financial year 2014, the method of calculating this 
impact is changing. Currently, IAS 19 calculates an income on a scheme’s assets 
and an expense on its liabilities to give a net income or cost (where asset returns 
and interest rates can be different) which can be taken in either operating profit  
or the interest line. The revised IAS 19 requires an income or expense to be 
calculated by applying a single interest rate to a scheme’s net surplus or net 
deficit. Under the revised standard, in 2014 there will be a charge to profit before 
tax of £2 million. Thus, there will be a negative impact on profit before tax  
of £13 million between 2013 and 2014 as a result of the change to IAS 19. It is 
important to note that the revision has no impact on the scheme, its members  
or the cash contribution that Debenhams has agreed with the trustees. 

Why did you have to take a write-off in Romania?

We took a write-off of £3.8 million in the first half of 2013 following the closure of 
the six franchise stores in Romania in February which related to some outstanding 
receivables dating back to 2011. We have since strengthened our controls and the 
financial support behind receivables.

What are your priorities for capital allocation?

We have a very clear order of priorities for cash. The first is to invest in the four 
pillars of the strategy to build a leading international, multi-channel brand. In 2013 
we spent £133.3 million on capital expenditure; you can see a breakdown of this 
spend on page 40. Secondly, we pay our shareholders a dividend and during 2013 
spent £41.4 million of cash on the 2012 final dividend and 2013 interim dividend. 
Our third priority is to reduce net debt to a level around one times EBITDA over 
the medium-term. Finally, any spare cash generated over and above these 
requirements will be returned to shareholders through the share buyback scheme.

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 38

Chief Financial Officer’s report continued 

Sales and revenue
Group gross transaction value (GTV) increased by 2.5% to £2,776.8 million for the 
52 weeks to 31 August 2013 (2012: £2,708.0 million) whilst Group revenue increased by 
2.3% to £2,282.2 million from £2,229.8 million. 

For the UK segment, GTV increased by 2.3% to £2,254.8 million (2012: £2,204.6 million) 
and revenue grew by 1.9% to £1,895.9 million. This was principally a result of:

•  Continued strong growth in online sales to UK customers

•  The benefits of the current store modernisation programme, under the first pillar  
of our strategy, which is delivering an increase of sales of c.6% in the first year  
following modernisation 

•  New stores opened during both 2012 and 2013

For the International segment, GTV of £522.0 million was 3.7% higher than last year 
and revenue increased by 4.5%. International growth was largely the result of: 

•  Increased trading with franchise partners

•  A strong sales performance from the Danish business Magasin du Nord

Group like-for-like sales increased by 2.0%, principally driven by growth in online sales 
of 46.2% to £366.3 million (2012: £250.6 million) which offset the weather-impacted 
performance of the UK stores. 

The components of sales growth in 2013 are shown in figure 2.

Figure 2: Components of sales growth in 2013

+4.1%

-2.7%

5

4

3

2

1

0

+0.7%

+0.4%

%
5
.
2
+
V
T
G

UK online

UK stores

UK space

International

Own bought products accounted for 76.7% of the sales mix (2012: 76.7%). UK own 
bought sales mix was essentially unchanged at 79.9% (2012: 80.0%) whilst International 
increased to 63.0% (2012: 62.6%). Overall, own bought sales grew by 2.5% whilst 
concession sales were 1.9% higher than the previous year.

Operating profit
Group gross margin was unchanged from the prior year. This reflected a good recovery 
in the second half of the year due to a combination of better intake margin and mix 
which more than offset a decline of 20 basis points in the first half which was caused by 
increased promotional activity and the impact of bad weather in the UK.

In the UK, store costs increased by 1.6% to £585.9 million (2012: £576.7 million) largely 
due to inflationary increases in rent, energy and payroll offset by a number of cost saving 
initiatives. UK online costs grew by 34.0% to £83.5 million (2012: £62.3 million), driven 
entirely by higher volumes. Importantly, online costs as a percentage of sales decreased 
by 270 basis points to 23.9% due to greater warehousing and distribution efficiencies 
arising from increased scale and bringing all own brand fulfilment in-house at the start 
of the second half. Other UK costs, which comprise those not directly attributable to 
either stores or online and include buying and merchandising, marketing and central 
functions, increased by 1.5%, largely due to inflation.

International store costs increased by 4.8% and other international costs by 2.9%, 
supporting the revenue store increase and associated bonus payments in  
Magasin du Nord.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
39

The IAS 19 pension credit contained within operating profit was £11.3 million 
(2012: £11.7 million). See note 23 starting on page 116 for further details.

Group depreciation and amortisation of £94.6 million increased by 3.3% 
(2012: £91.6 million) largely reflecting the store modernisation programme.

Group operating profit declined by 4.0% to £168.0 million (2012: £175.0 million) with  
the UK down 3.1% to £139.8 million (2012: £144.3 million) and International down 8.1%  
to £28.2 million (2012: £30.7 million) for the reasons described above. 

Interest
The net interest cost of £14.0 million represented a decrease of 16.2% from last year 
(2012: £16.7 million). See notes 8 and 9 on page 100 for further details.

Profit before tax
Group profit before tax for the year decreased by 2.7% to £154.0 million 
(2012: £158.3 million), largely due to lower operating profit for the reasons  
described above. 

Taxation and profit after tax
The Group’s tax charge of £26.1 million on a profit of £154.0 million gave an effective tax 
rate of 16.9% compared with 20.8% for the prior year, due to a reduction in the headline 
rate of corporation tax, the resolution of historical issues in the current year and the 
recognition of tax losses at Magasin du Nord. See note 10 on page 101 for further details.

The lower taxation charge resulted in profit after tax increasing by 2.1% to £127.9 million 
(2012: £125.3 million).

Earnings per share
Total basic and diluted earnings per share were 10.2 pence, compared with 9.8 pence 
for the prior year. The weighted average number of shares in issue in 2013 was  
1,254.5 million (2012: 1,281.3 million) largely due to the purchase of 23.9 million shares  
in the share buyback scheme.

Cash flow and uses of cash
Debenhams remains a highly cash generative business. Operating cash flow before 
financing and taxation was £107.8 million. Cash flow generation, the uses of cash  
and the movement in net debt are summarised in figure 3.

Figure 3: Cash flow and uses of cash

52 weeks to 31 
August 2013

52 weeks to 1 
September 2012

EBITDA

Working capital

Capital expenditure

Operating cash flow before financing and taxation

Taxation

Financing

Dividends paid

Share buyback

Other

Change in net debt

Opening net debt

Closing net debt

£262.8m

£(21.7)m

£(133.3)m

£107.8m

£(29.3)m

£(12.5)m

£(41.4)m

£(25.1)m

£(2.8)m

£(3.3)m

£368.7m

£372.0m

£266.8m

£(7.1)m

£(118.6)m

£141.1m

£(44.6)m

£(13.6)m

£(38.5)m

£(20.1)m

£(9.3)m

£15.0m

£383.7m

£368.7m

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 40

Chief Financial Officer’s report continued 

Capital expenditure
Capital expenditure during the year was £133.3 million, an increase of 12.4% versus  
the previous year (2012: £118.6 million). The key components of capital expenditure  
in 2013 are detailed in figure 4. We expect capital expenditure in 2014 to be in the region 
of £135 million. Thereafter, we anticipate it will fall back towards depreciation and 
amortisation at c.£100 million.

Figure 4: Capital investment to support the four pillars of the strategy

New UK stores  
UK store modernisations  
UK maintenance 
International 
Group systems 
Group warehouse 
Head office move 
Other 

%
6
31 
15
7
23
5
9
4

Dividends
An interim dividend of 1.0 pence per share was paid to shareholders on 5 July 2013 
(2012: 1.0 pence). The board has recommended a final dividend of 2.4 pence per share 
which will be paid to shareholders on 10 January 2014 taking the total dividend for the 
year to 3.4 pence (2012: 3.3 pence).
Share buyback
During the year 23.9 million shares were bought for a total expenditure of £25.1 million. 
All shares purchased since the share buyback programme commenced in 2012 have 
been transferred to treasury.
A further 14.3 million of shares were purchased after the year end, taking the total 
purchased over the 12 months to 23 October 2013 to £40.2 million (38.2 million shares),  
in line with our commitment.
Net debt
After taking into account £25.1 million of share buybacks, the Group’s net debt position 
as at 31 August 2013 was £372.0 million (1 September 2012: £368.7 million). The ratio of 
reported net debt to EBITDA was 1.4 times, level with last year.
Balance sheet
Key balance sheet items are summarised in figure 5.

Figure 5: Balance sheet

Intangible assets

Property, plant and equipment

Inventory

Other assets

Trade and other payables

Other liabilities

Retirement benefit obligations

Net deferred tax assets

Net debt

Reported net assets

31 August 2013 1 September 2012

£876.5m

£692.1m

£357.9m

£105.4m

£(545.8)m

£(359.9)m

£(20.0)m

£10.2m

£(372.0)m

£744.4m

£864.9m

£661.6m

£332.3m

£105.2m

£(525.4)m

£(370.1)m

£(57.3)m

£18.5m

£(368.7)m

£661.0m

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
 
41

Inventory
Stock levels were managed very tightly during the year given the difficult market 
conditions. Total stock increased by 7.7% to £357.9 million with almost all of this increase 
attributable to online expansion and international growth. The stock value into UK 
department stores fell by 0.7%. Terminal stock at year end was in line with the historical 
average at 3.1%.
Pensions
The Group provides a number of pension arrangements for its employees. These 
include the Debenhams Retirement Scheme and the Debenhams Executive Pension 
Plan (together the “Group’s pension schemes“) which both closed for future service 
accrual from 31 October 2006. Under IAS 19, the Group’s pension schemes’ net deficit as 
at 31 August 2013 was £20.0 million (1 September 2012: £57.3 million). Further information 
can be found in note 23 to the Group financial statements starting on page 116.
A triennial actuarial valuation was completed in March 2012 and discussions with the 
pension schemes’ trustees were subsequently concluded. The contributions from the 
Group and the investment strategies devised by the trustees are intended to restore  
the schemes to a fully funded position on an ongoing basis by the end of March 2022 
(Debenhams Retirement Scheme) and August 2021 (Debenhams Executive Pension 
Plan). As a consequence of this agreed plan, annual contributions to the two schemes 
were set at £8.9 million, rising each year by RPI. The Group also pays the non-investment 
expenses and levies to the Pension Protection Fund.
Current pension arrangements for Debenhams’ employees are provided by a defined 
contribution pension scheme which is administered by Legal & General.
Financial position 
During the year, the Group extended £550.0 million of its £650.0 million senior credit 
facility from October 2015 to October 2016. At the same time, the Group repurchased  
£35.0 million of the £100.0 million facility that was not extended.
The senior credit facility contains fixed charge cover and leverage covenants, which  
were both met in full during the year. The directors believe that the Group has sufficient 
headroom to ensure compliance for the foreseeable future.
Financing risk and treasury management
The board has established an overall treasury policy which has approved authority levels 
within which the treasury function must operate. Treasury policy is to manage risks within  
the agreed framework whilst not taking speculative positions.
The policies and strategies for managing financial risks are disclosed in note 21  
of the Group financial statements starting on page 109.

Simon Herrick
Chief Financial Officer

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 42

Risk review 
Safeguarding future returns

Effective management of 
risks and opportunities is 
essential if Debenhams is 
to deliver its strategic and 
operational goals, protect 
its reputation and ultimately 
enhance shareholder value.

The board, which has overall responsibility for risk management and internal control, 
considers it important that there should be a regular and systematic approach to the 
management of risks in order to provide assurance that strategic and operational goals 
can be met and the Group’s reputation is protected. 

In order to identify and manage risks effectively, a risk management framework has  
been developed, which includes: processes to identify the risks facing the Group;  
a process to evaluate the potential impact of risks; appropriate controls and strategies  
to treat the risks; reporting requirements for changes to the risk profile; and details  
of specific roles and responsibilities relating to the management of risk. The Group’s 
management team is expected to utilise the risk management framework when 
assessing risks and implementing suitable controls. 

Risk management framework
The board is responsible for the Group’s system of internal control, which is based  
on the COSO model (covering control environment, risk assessment, information and 
communication, control activities and monitoring) and for reviewing the effectiveness 
of the internal control systems in place. Such systems are designed to manage rather 
than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve the strategic business objectives. They can 
only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement  
or loss. The board has conducted a review of the effectiveness of internal controls  
and is satisfied that the controls in place remain appropriate.

The board exemplifies the control environment to its stakeholders through its 
compliance with the UK Corporate Governance Code, Debenhams’ policies and 
procedures and, in particular, policies covering risk management, code of business 
conduct and anti-bribery and corruption. 

To support this system for internal control, the Debenhams risk management framework 
(figure 1) has been developed using the principles of the international standard 
ISO 31000 (Risk Management).

Figure 1: Debenhams risk management framework

j

s
e
v
i
t
c
e
b
o
c
i
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

Strategic objectives

Report

Define risk appetite

Risk reporting

Audit Committee

Executive committee

t
a
e
r
T

Define principal risks
and risk treatment

Risk management
team

Risk identification

Divisions

Risk identification 

Risk evaluation 

Evaluate

Strategic objectives

Specialist functions

I

d
e
n
t
i
f
y

S
t
r
a
t
e
g
i
c
o
b
e
c
t
i
v
e
s

j

This framework highlights the central role that the management of risk plays in the 
successful delivery of strategic objectives, including the four pillars of our strategy 
to build a leading international, multi-channel brand, and the fact that this process  
is dependent on people fulfilling their clearly defined roles and responsibilities.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
 
43

The key points of the process are described in more detail below.

Risk identification
Risks exist within all operations and it is important to identify them in order  
to understand the degree to which their occurrence would threaten the delivery  
of key objectives.

Risks are identified through a number of routes. They include the membership of 
industry bodies, environmental scanning (e.g. market research), changes to legislation, 
enterprise risk management best practices, strategic planning exercises, ongoing 
operational reviews by management, project governance processes, internal audits 
and control environment reviews. 

In addition to this, an extensive review was undertaken of the organisation’s risk universe 
to verify that all key risks have been identified and to ensure that management has 
considered these as part of its control environment. This organisation-wide review  
is facilitated by the risk management team for each operating division on an ongoing 
cyclical basis. All senior managers participate in the exercise, including the board. It 
considers strategy, objectives and risks to their achievement together with the existing 
and new controls required to mitigate risk. The outputs from this process are collated 
into the Group’s risk register and are taken into consideration when setting the annual 
internal audit plan. Management is required to update the register with any new or 
emerging risks as they are identified.

Risk evaluation
In order to understand the impact specific risks would have to the Group, each risk 
is evaluated based on the likelihood of occurrence and its severity. 

The risk ranking matrix (figure 2) has been developed to ensure that a consistent 
approach is taken when assessing the overall impact to the Group. Likelihood is based 
on the frequency of occurrence across rolling time periods and severity is determined 
by the degree of change across key performance indicators.

Figure 2: Risk ranking matrix

Frequency of event occurence

RISK RANKING MATRIX

Event will probably occur at least 
once every year

Frequent

4

4

16

36

64

Event will probably occur once 
every 3 years

Common

Event will probably occur at least 
once every 10  years

Occasional

Event will probably occur less than 
once every 10 years

Unlikely

3

2

1

3

2

1

12

27

48

8

4

18

32

9

16

1 (12)

4 (22)

9 (32)

16 (42)

Low Moderate Serious Critical

Severity of impact
(based on specific degrees 
of change across one or more 
financial or reputational key 
performance indicators)

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 44

Risk review continued

Management is responsible for ensuring that risks are evaluated correctly, with support 
from the finance department as required. Individual managers consider the cumulative 
impact of all risks across their particular area of operation when determining the state 
of their overall control environment. The purpose of this exercise is to calculate the risk 
score for each risk identified, which determines the level of treatment expected. 

The board reviews the key risks to the Group, taking action to strengthen where 
necessary, and the output from this is used to populate the Group’s risk map.

Risk treatment
The board is responsible for determining the nature and extent of the risks it is willing 
to take in achieving its strategic objectives, which is defined as the risk appetite and  
is outlined in figure 3.

Figure 3: Risk appetite matrix

Risk score 

Risk matrix  
zone 

1, 2, 3 or 4  Green 

8, 9 or 12 

(Limited) 

Yellow 
(Moderate) 

Action 

Optional 

Optional 

Risk  
response 

Treat or  
tolerate 

Treat or  
tolerate 

Treatment 
timeframe 

Risk  
acceptance 
owner

9-12 months  Head of 

department 

6-9 months 

Line director 

16, 18 or 27  Orange

(Significant) 

32, 36, 48  
or 64 

Red 
(Ultimate) 

Yes 

Yes 

Treat, transfer 
or terminate 

Treat, transfer 
or terminate 

3-6 months  Executive 

committee 

0-3 months  Main board 

The risk score, derived from the risk ranking matrix, is compared to the risk appetite 
matrix, which provides guidance on the expected level of treatment, timeframes  
and authority levels. The four methods used to treat risk are:

•  Tolerate (accept risk and take no further action)

•  Treat (reduce risk by defining and completing appropriate actions to improve 

or implement controls)

•  Transfer (share a risk via insurance policies or asking a third party to take the risk 

in another way)

•  Terminate (avoid risk quickly and decisively by eliminating or re-engineering  

the activities that lead to the risk occurring)

Risk reporting and monitoring
Individual managers are expected to define and analyse the reports they require 
to enhance financial and operational performance and identify emerging risks  
or control failures. 

Financial performance is monitored through a number of processes. An operating plan 
is prepared in August of each year, shortly before the start of the financial year, and  
a revised forecast is prepared each month of the financial year which analyses actual 
performance and highlights variances against the plan. In particular, performance is 
monitored through a series of key metrics. Daily sales, weekly sales and margin and 
monthly management accounts are prepared, all of which report on performance 
against the operating plan, last year and forecast. Additionally, a treasury report is 
delivered to members of the executive committee and to the Audit Committee which 
covers matters such as senior operating restrictions, covenant reporting and forecasting 
(under the Group’s banking facilities), exposure to foreign exchange and hedging 
arrangements, net debt and interest rate hedging, cash flow and cash flow forecasting, 
and amounts deposited with counterparties.

Performance is reviewed by the board, executive committee, Audit Committee, business 
continuity management committee and at executive health and safety meetings. There 
are also other mechanisms in place to monitor risks such as internal audit reviews, critical 
and serious risk monitor, fraud detection systems, whistleblowing, stock counts and 
security equipment such as CCTV.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201345

In addition, the Audit Committee satisfies itself that the key risks are being monitored 
by senior management and that the internal audit plan is focused on high priority  
areas. The internal audit team updates the board and the Audit Committee on the 
effectiveness of risk management within each discrete area audited throughout the 
year. The Audit Committee will bring any areas of concern to the attention of the board.

Roles and responsibilities
The effective management of risk is reliant upon all employees successfully performing 
their specific roles and responsibilities and individual managers are expected to 
familiarise themselves with their responsibilities, which are outlined below, and to 
act accordingly. 

Only suitably qualified employees are responsible for each of the functions within the 
Group to ensure that each area operates effectively. Training, performance reviews and 
support mechanisms are in place to ensure standards of performance are maintained.

Board of directors
The board of directors is responsible for: approving the risk management policy and 
related framework; setting and communicating the Group’s risk appetite and related 
policies; setting the tone and culture for managing risk; providing strategic direction 
and guidance on risk-related decision making; ensuring that risk management processes 
are adopted across the whole Group; obtaining assurance on the effectiveness and 
compliance with the risk management framework; reporting on the management of risk 
to stakeholders; and signing off public disclosures related to risk and risk management.

Divisional directors and heads of function 
Divisional directors and heads of function are responsible for: identifying and evaluating 
the risks that relate to their areas and activities; implementing appropriate controls to 
manage risks in line with the Group’s risk appetite; and taking ownership for risks and 
controls within their area of responsibility.

All employees
All employees are responsible for: being aware of the risks that relate to their roles 
and their activities; continuously improving their management of risk; implementing 
appropriate controls to manage risks; and reporting ineffective and/or inefficient 
controls wherever they sit.

Risk management and internal audit 
The Group’s risk management and internal audit function is made up of three discrete 
areas: risk management, internal audit and profit protection, all of which report into the 
Director of Internal Audit and Risk Management. This combination enables the Group 
to maintain a cohesive approach to all aspects of risk management whilst allowing the 
internal audit team to benefit from the insights that other areas of the function 
can provide.

Risk management team
The risk management team is responsible for: developing, implementing and reviewing 
the risk management framework and process; promoting effective risk management at 
all levels of the Group; encouraging an appropriate risk culture within the Group; liaising 
with other functions that advise on specialist areas; coordinating responses where risks 
impact more than one area; reporting, escalating and communicating risk management 
issues to key stakeholders; and providing assurance regarding risk management within 
the Group. In addition, the team manages corporate insurance and undertakes business 
continuity planning activities.

Internal audit team
In relation to risk management, the internal audit team is responsible for providing 
independent assessment of: the design, operation and effectiveness of the risk 
management framework and process; management of key risks, including the 
effectiveness of the controls; reporting of risk and control status; reliability of 
assurances provided by management relating to risk management.

Profit protection
The profit protection team’s responsibilities include activities such as ensuring loss 
prevention strategies are developed and implemented, anti-fraud monitoring across 
the Group and the management of whistleblowing.

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 46

Risk review continued

Whistleblowing 
All Debenhams’ employees are required to adhere to the code of business conduct  
and the anti-bribery and corruption policy, with senior employees required to confirm 
their compliance in writing. These policies set out the ethical standards expected  
by the Group and include details of how matters can be raised in strict confidence.  
Two main routes are available to employees at all levels within the Group to raise 
concerns over malpractice. The first, “Employees’ guidelines to problem solving“,  
encourages employees to talk to their line manager, their manager’s line manager  
or, if still concerned, to call HR Connect (the central human resources team) directly.  
The second route is a confidential reporting line through which employees can speak  
to the Group anti-fraud team. If an employee feels that the matter is so serious that  
it cannot be discussed in any of these ways, s/he can contact the Company Secretary  
or the Director of Internal Audit and Risk Management. The Group’s policy on 
whistleblowing and these methods of raising issues of concern are published  
on the Debenhams’ intranet and emphasised on posters. The policy is reviewed  
annually by the Audit Committee. All serious matters identified are raised with  
the chairman of the Audit Committee. 

Business continuity planning
The business continuity committee comprises the Chief Financial Officer, Retail Director, 
HR Director and Director of Internal Audit and Risk Management. Other executives are 
invited to attend meetings as and when appropriate.

The objectives of this committee are to ensure that potential threats to the Group and 
the impacts that those threats might cause have been identified, that a framework that 
builds organisational resilience to known threats is in place and that the framework is 
capable of providing an effective response to safeguard the Group.

The committee uses a framework based on ISO 22301:2012 (Business Continuity 
Management Systems) and undertakes a number of key activities. These are to review 
and agree: the business continuity management policy and how it will be managed and 
communicated; the risks and threats facing the Group and prioritise them based on the 
evaluation of their severity and likelihood; the business continuity management strategy; 
the business continuity management response and its implementation; the process for 
exercising, maintaining and reviewing business continuity management arrangements; 
and the mechanisms to embed business continuity management in the Group’s culture.

Principal risks and uncertainties 
The risks detailed on pages 47 to 51 and in the notes to the financial statements are  
the principal risks and uncertainties that may impact the Group’s ability to achieve its 
strategic and operational goals. Both external factors and internal factors are included 
in the risks and uncertainties that could substantially impact performance and therefore 
delivery of one or more of the four pillars of the strategy to build a leading international, 
multi-channel brand (focusing on UK retail, delivering a compelling customer proposition, 
increasing availability and choice through multi-channel and expanding the brand 
internationally). Relevant mitigation for each risk is also outlined. These risks are 
presented in no particular order but have been grouped by type of risk. 

It should be noted that any system of risk management and internal control is designed 
to manage rather than eliminate the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and  
can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement 
or loss.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201347

External risks

Risk and impact

Continuing adverse economic conditions may have 
a material adverse effect on Debenhams’ results

A decline in sales on discretionary purchases and 
reduction in gross transaction value

The sector in which Debenhams operates 
is highly competitive 

Place pressure on our pricing strategy, margins and 
profitability

Failing to deliver business critical projects may divert 
financial and management resources from more 
beneficial uses and significantly damage ability  
to manage information technology systems

Factors influencing the sustainability of 
the supply chain

Any of the risks associated with doing business in 
foreign markets and/or importing merchandise from 
these regions could place pressure on margins or 
require the Group to divert financial and management 
resources from more beneficial uses

Factors outside Debenhams’ control, such as 
increases in energy or fuel costs, may have an 
adverse effect on its results

Place pressure on margin and will also divert financial 
and management resources from more beneficial uses

Example of mitigation

Change*

The board conducts strategic business reviews which ensure  
that management is focused on key priorities and cost control. 
These reviews also focus on the four pillars of the Group’s 
strategy to build a leading international, multi-channel brand.

The ongoing economic situation means that households 
generally remain cautious about non-discretionary spending.

Debenhams’ brand and product strategy gives customers a 
unique, differentiated and exclusive choice of brands, products 
and categories within a good/better/best pricing architecture. 
An understanding of customers and their needs is developed 
by listening to their views, market intelligence and reviewing key 
performance indicators which ensures that pricing is competitive. 
Debenhams is investing additional resources in customer 
analytics and insight including the development of a “single 
customer view“.

Business critical projects are undertaken to support the delivery 
of strategic objectives. For each such project, a full investment 
appraisal is conducted as part of the decision making process 
and must be signed off by a member of the executive committee 
before any work is undertaken. As part of project governance,  
a steering committee monitors all key areas involved in delivery,  
a framework is used, selected projects will be reviewed by 
internal audit and post investment appraisals are undertaken.

To strengthen the resilience of core systems and to enhance  
the overall governance framework, an information systems road 
map has been developed. This will also support the efficient  
and effective delivery of strategic projects.

Debenhams fosters excellent, mutually beneficial relationships 
with its suppliers. Both parties work towards the objective of 
optimising sustainable fulfilment and costs, which is measured 
regularly by management through key performance indicators. 
Alongside this, Debenhams develops multiple sourcing routes 
to ensure pricing remains competitive and that demand can 
be supplied.

Debenhams and its suppliers will continue to work hard to deliver 
the best performance possible in a very challenging market.

This is a decreasing risk as Debenhams continues to develop 
its supplier base to mitigate the potential of cost price inflation 
without compromising the quality of its products. In addition, 
the sourcing division has been strengthened to include 
additional expertise which assists with sourcing decisions, 
production consolidation and lead time reduction, amongst 
other things.

A key objective of the energy committee is to control  
energy usage, including the impact of the Carbon Reduction 
Commitment scheme. An energy hedging policy is in place 
to provide a high degree of cost certainty in the short-term.

*Change in severity and/or likelihood of risk during course of 2013.

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 48

Financial risks

Risk and impact

Risk review continued

Example of mitigation

Change*

Currency fluctuations and hedging risks could 
materially adversely affect Debenhams’ earnings 
and cash flow 

Hinder ability to adjust rapidly to changing market 
conditions and impact earnings and cash flow

Hedging strategy may not adequately protect 
operating results from the impact of exchange rate 
fluctuations or may limit any benefit caused by 
favourable movements in exchange rates

Affect available cash and liquidity and could have 
material effect on the business, results of operations 
and financial condition

Debenhams operates a treasury policy which covers 
counterparty limits and hedging for interest rates, foreign 
exchange and energy. There is also an internal treasury function 
which is mandated by the board and audited annually.

Debenhams closely monitors all aspects of cash management 
to optimise balance sheet metrics. Effectiveness is measured 
regularly by management through a series of key performance 
indicators.

Business critical spreadsheets and databases used by the 
finance department have been identified and appropriate 
control measures are used in line with Debenhams’ policy 
to ensure data integrity.

An increase in the Group’s funding needs or 
changes to obligations in respect of its pension 
schemes could have an adverse impact on its 
business in the longer term

The trustees of the Group’s pension schemes carefully  
monitor the pension fund and alter the investment strategy  
as appropriate. Any shortfall in funding is brought to the 
attention of the board.

An increase in the Group’s pension related liabilities 
could have a material adverse impact on the Group’s 
profits and cash flow in the longer term

Please refer to the notes to the financial statements for other risks in this category.

Strategic risks

Risk and impact

Example of mitigation

Change*

Debenhams may not be able to predict accurately 
or fulfil customer preferences or demand 

Sales will be lower, market share will be reduced  
and may be forced to rely on additional markdowns  
or promotional sales to dispose of excess or slow-
moving inventory or may experience inventory 
shortfalls on popular merchandise, any of which  
could have a material adverse effect on the business, 
financial condition and results of operations

Debenhams utilises market, trend and customer awareness 
research to understand current demands and preferences.  
It delivers these requirements through multiple channels, 
including its store and non-store sales channels. To achieve this, 
these channels are constantly developed and high operational 
standards maintained to differentiate from competitors. Stock 
levels and the supply chain are monitored closely in order  
to ensure product newness is maximised.

Debenhams depends upon key management and 
other personnel and the departure of such 
management or personnel could adversely affect 
its business 

In order to attract and retain talent, both succession and  
personal development plans are in place throughout the  
Group. In addition, target-led, performance-related incentive 
schemes exist.

Could significantly delay or prevent the achievement 
of Debenhams’ business plan and could have a 
material adverse effect on Debenhams’ business, 
financial condition or results of operations 

A failure to develop and implement Debenhams’ 
new store rollout successfully may adversely affect 
its business 

Reduced growth or a decline in gross transaction 
value and may be required to write down the value of 
any stock acquired for sale in an uncompleted store

Debenhams undertakes research of key markets and 
demographics to identify potential locations to drive growth 
through new space, which may also take the form of an 
acquisition. A full investment appraisal is conducted as part  
of the decision making process and a specialist team has 
responsibility for end-to-end management of each project  
once the decision is made.

*Change in severity and/or likelihood of risk during course of 2013.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201349

Strategic risks

Risk and impact

Any events that negatively impact the reputation  
of or value associated with Debenhams’ brand 
could adversely affect its business

Unfavourable publicity concerning Debenhams,  
its ethical trading policies, its business policies 
including health and safety, its corporate 
responsibility practices, any of its brands  
or products, its supply chain practices or any  
of its franchisees or manufacturers or a substantial 
erosion in the reputation of, or value associated  
with, the Debenhams brand may lead to a loss  
of stakeholder trust and confidence and could  
have a material adverse effect on Debenhams’  
ability to attract and retain third party brands, 
suppliers, designers, concessions and franchisees, 
which could consequently impact Debenhams’ 
business, financial condition or results of operations

Example of mitigation

Change*

Ethical sourcing, legislative change and corporate responsibility 
matters are key areas of focus for the sustainability committee. 
To ensure that Debenhams has the most current information 
available, it is a member of relevant industry bodies that provide 
awareness of changes to standards and legislation. Debenhams 
is an active member of Ethical Trading Initiative (ETI) and  
expects all suppliers to follow the ETI base code and adhere to 
Debenhams’ own supplier code of conduct which is underpinned 
by Debenhams’ robust policy on compliance with a real focus  
on social and ethical standards.

As Bangladesh will continue to be a major source of production, 
Debenhams is in the process of opening a local presence to 
ensure that production is only carried out in appropriate factories.

Debenhams has signed the Bangladesh Accord which commits 
the signatories to the goal of a safe and sustainable ready-made 
garment industry in that country in which no worker needs  
to fear fires, building collapses or other accidents that could  
be prevented with reasonable health and safety measures.

A reliance on third party suppliers and franchisees, the 
challenges of the current economic environment and the 
complexity of the new and existing legislation makes this an 
ongoing risk which Debenhams and its suppliers/franchisees 
have to manage. 

An executive health and safety committee exists to review 
compliance with legal and regulatory obligations and a number 
of participants are members of various relevant industry bodies. 
The committee receives input from specialist teams which focus 
on discrete aspects. These include health and safety, building 
services, insurance and retail operations. To support compliance 
and to maintain high operational standards, health and safety 
awareness programmes are in place and each site has its own 
health and safety committee.

*Change in severity and/or likelihood of risk during course of 2013.

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 50

Risk review continued

Hazard

Risk and impact

Factors outside Debenhams’ control, such as 
damage or interruptions due to operational 
disruption, natural disaster, pandemics, terrorist 
activity, strikes or riots may have a material 
adverse effect on its results

Unable to continue operations smoothly in the event 
of a major incident which may have an adverse effect on 
inventory and gross transaction value and divert financial 
and management resources from more beneficial uses. 
Any terrorist attacks, armed conflicts, social unrest or 
other geopolitical uncertainty could result in a significant 
reduction in consumer confidence and spending levels

Risks associated with systems failure, external attack 
of systems, or data inaccuracy may also significantly 
damage ability to manage information technology 
systems or could cause inappropriate decisions to  
be made using wrong or ambiguous information

Debenhams’ business could suffer as a result  
of weak sales during peak selling seasons  
or extreme or unseasonal weather conditions 

Adverse effect on inventory, gross transaction value 
and results of operations

Example of mitigation

Change*

The business continuity committee is comprised of senior 
executives and works to a framework based on the most recent 
international standard. The key objectives of this committee  
are to ensure that potential threats to the organisation and the 
impacts that those threats might cause have been identified,  
that a framework that builds organisational resilience to known 
threats is in place and that the framework has the capability  
to deliver an effective response to safeguard the Group.

Monitoring processes are in place across a number of key 
business systems, alongside specialist teams and a disaster 
recovery site is in place where associated systems are tested  
to ensure that invocation would work if required.

Insurance policies have been placed as appropriate to minimise 
the impact of specific risks.

This is an increasing risk based on the unpredictable instability 
of various territories around the world.

Debenhams sells a diverse mix of product categories in order to 
reduce reliance on categories that may be weather dependent.  
To help mitigate the impact of this risk, should it occur, management 
would review the benefits of strengthening both planned and 
tactical promotional activity or marketing activity to drive sales.

This has been separated out from the risk covering natural 
disasters (see above) in recognition of the impact that this risk  
has had and could have on Debenhams’ business.

Debenhams’ business may be materially adversely 
affected by changes to, or a breach by the Group  
of, laws or regulations 

Debenhams has specialist accounting, taxation and legal and 
secretariat teams and is also a member of key industry bodies 
which provide awareness of changes to standards and legislation.

Adverse effect on inventory and gross transaction 
value and will divert financial and management 
resources from more beneficial uses

Forums exist to focus on specific areas of legislation and specific 
business policies and procedures are in place to ensure roles  
and responsibilities are understood across the Group.

Theft of customer data or breach of payment card 
industry (PCI) standards could adversely affect 
Debenhams’ business operations, reputation  
and results 

Negative effect on reputation leading to loss of 
stakeholder trust and confidence, with subsequent 
impact on performance and results, and will divert 
financial and management resources from more 
beneficial uses

Any disruption or other adverse event affecting 
Debenhams’ relationship with any of its major 
suppliers, franchise partners, store card providers, 
designers, concessionaires or outsourcing partners

Costs associated with the transfer of the operations or the 
potential of extra operational cost from a new provider 

Changes in exclusivity arrangements with designers 
or any decline in their popularity could have a material 
adverse impact

Loss of a number of important concession or franchise 
partners may adversely affect gross transaction value

Adverse events within the supply chain could restrict the 
availability or significantly increase the cost of goods 

Credit insurance difficulties for a significant number of 
suppliers could lead to a detrimental variation of terms 
or alternative suppliers used to source some goods

Steering groups exist for both data protection and PCI standards 
which review and report on compliance levels. Debenhams utilises 
external specialists as required to assist in achieving its compliance 
goals, with compliance to the PCI standard monitored by 
management and reported to the Audit Committee. A number 
of security tools are employed to protect data, including 
encryption, intruder detection and data loss prevention.

In order to minimise the impact of any third party relationship 
or performance issues, Debenhams’ objectives are to: maintain 
excellent third party relationships by ensuring strategies are 
aligned; have appropriate, unambiguous contracts in place; 
ensure third parties are financially robust; and have contingency 
plans in place in the event of a failure (e.g. conversion of space  
to own bought for concessionaire failure, multiple sourcing 
routes for supplier failure).

Following the Cypriot financial crisis, management is closely 
monitoring the performance of the franchise business in 
this territory.

Furthermore, controls and the financial support behind 
receivables have been strengthened to mitigate the risk  
of franchise partner failure.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201351

Hazard continued

Risk and impact

Acts of fraud, theft and industrial espionage could 
adversely affect Debenhams’ business operations, 
reputation and results 

Negative effect on reputation and will divert 
financial and management resources from more 
beneficial uses

Operational risks

Risk and impact

Ineffective brand awareness and marketing 
programmes could materially adversely affect 
Debenhams’ business and sales 

Loss of market share, customer loyalty, reduction in 
gross transaction value and a decline in sales on 
discretionary purchases

Risks associated with Debenhams’ properties may 
have a material adverse effect on Debenhams’ 
business, financial condition or results of operations

Significant alterations in rental terms could have  
a material adverse effect on the business, as would 
failure to secure desirable locations

Disputes over store modernisations may lead to 
reinstatement costs and termination of leases may 
lead to dilapidation costs being incurred

Failure to manage asbestos in specific properties may 
lead to fines or other liabilities affecting Debenhams’ 
reputation and the full or partial closure of properties

Following the sales of leases by members of the 
Group and guarantees which may have been given 
in respect of leases taken by former members of  
the Group, should an assignee or former member  
of the Group default under such a lease, then the 
relevant member of the Group would then be liable 
for the fulfilment of obligations under the lease

Example of mitigation

Change*

In order to mitigate fraud across all channels in which 
Debenhams operates, a number of preventative measures 
are in place. These include accounting policies and procedures, 
systems access restrictions, expenditure authorisation levels, 
whistleblowing and anti-bribery and corruption policies and  
a code of business conduct, all of which provide employees with 
guidelines on how to escalate an issue confidentially. A variety 
of monitoring mechanisms are used to identify fraudulent activity 
including data mining across point of sale and head office 
functions. As part of the organisation-wide risk assessment, 
individual managers sign an anti-fraud, bribery and corruption 
declaration. Issues identified are investigated and reported to 
the Audit Committee.

Example of mitigation

Change*

Debenhams utilises market, trend and customer awareness 
research to understand current demands and preferences.  
This information is used to identify specific segments of  
the market to target and to form a proposal for a marketing 
campaign. A full investment appraisal is conducted and must  
be signed off by a member of the executive committee before 
any campaign is undertaken. Campaign effectiveness is 
monitored through external feedback and internal analysis. 

Debenhams has a specialist property team which manages all 
aspects of leasehold property, including cost renegotiations, 
communication of the store modernisation programme, lease 
renewals and adherence to all legal obligations under the lease.

Debenhams is also a member of key industry bodies which 
provide awareness of changes to standards and legislation.

Debenhams consults with industry experts to ensure that the 
asbestos policy and asbestos register are fully up to date. All 
locations where asbestos has been identified are clearly marked 
with signage and the condition is checked on a regular basis 
with action taken in the event of any deterioration. Any works 
undertaken in these areas are approved by both the health 
and safety and building services teams prior to any work permits 
being issued with specialist companies used as required.

*Change in severity and/or likelihood of risk during course of 2013.

Debenhams plc Annual Report and Accounts 2013OverviewDirectors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategyFinancial reviewStrategic report 52

Directors’ report 

The directors present their  
report and the audited financial  
statements of Debenhams plc  
(the “Company”) together with  
its subsidiary undertakings  
(the “Group”) for the period  
ended 31 August 2013.

Principal activities
Debenhams is a leading international, multi-channel brand  
with a proud British heritage which trades from 238 stores across 
29 countries. Customer reach is extended via online stores at 
www.debenhams.com, www.debenhams.ie, www.debenhams.de 
and www.magasin.dk and through mobile sites and apps. 
Debenhams gives its customers around the world a unique, 
differentiated and exclusive mix of own brands, international 
brands and concessions. In the UK, Debenhams has a top five 
market share in womenswear and menswear and a top ten share  
in childrenswear. It leads the market in premium health and 
beauty. Debenhams is the tenth biggest UK online retailer  
by traffic volume and has been awarded “International Growth 
Initiative of the Year“ and “Retail Technology Initiative of  
the Year for Endless Aisle“ at the Oracle Retail Week Awards.

A detailed review of the business of the Group during the 
financial year ended 31 August 2013, including an analysis of the 
position of the Group at the end of the financial year, the trends 
and factors likely to affect the future development, performance 
and position of the business and a description of the principal 
risks and uncertainties the Group faces are set out on pages  
2 to 51 which constitute the strategic report and are therefore 
incorporated into this report by reference. Information about 
environmental matters, employees and social and community 
issues appear on the Company’s Sustainability website  
http://sustainability.debenhamsplc.com. 

Events since the year end
Since the year end Debenhams has:

•  Opened international franchise stores in Estonia, Libya  

and Malaysia

•  Received a statement of objections from the OFT in respect  

of sports bra products. Refer to note 32 of the financial 
statements on page 126 for further information

•  Bought a further 14.3 million shares

Directors
Composition of the board
The following persons were directors of the Company during the 
period ended 31 August 2013 and unless otherwise stated at the 
date of this Annual Report:

•  Nigel Northridge

•  Michael Sharp

•  Simon Herrick

•  Dennis Millard

•  Peter Fitzgerald (appointed 4 October 2012)

•  Stephen Ingham (appointed 8 January 2013)

•  Martina King

•  Mark Rolfe

•  Sophie Turner Laing

The membership of the board and biographical details of the 
directors are given on pages 56 to 57. The rules governing the 
appointment and replacement of the board members are set  
out in the Company’s Articles of Association. In accordance with 
the UK Corporate Governance Code, all directors will retire at  
the forthcoming Annual General Meeting of the Company and 
will offer themselves for re-election, except for Stephen Ingham 
who will offer himself for election. A formal evaluation of the 
performance of each director and of the board has been  
carried out and the performance of each of them continues  
to be effective and demonstrates commitment to his or her role. 
There is more information on the evaluation and its outcome 
within the corporate governance report on page 55.

In addition to the indemnity provisions in the Articles  
of Association, the Company and other Group companies  
have entered into a direct indemnity agreement with each of  
the directors and with certain other officers or senior employees  
of the Group. These indemnities constitute qualifying indemnities 
for the purposes of the Companies Act 2006 and remain in force 
at the date of approval of this report without any payment having 
been made under them. The Company also maintains directors’ 
and officers’ liability insurance which gives appropriate cover  
for any legal action brought against its directors.

Information relating to the remuneration and share interests  
of each director is given in the directors’ remuneration report on 
pages 81 to 82. No director had, during or at the end of the year, 
any material interest in any contract of significance in relation  
to the Group’s business.

Profit and dividends
The profit after tax for the financial year ending 31 August 2013 
was £127.9 million (2012: £125.3 million). The directors recommend 
the payment of a final dividend of 2.4 pence per ordinary share,  
to be paid on 10 January 2014 to members on the share register 
at the close of business on 6 December 2013. This, together with 
the interim dividend of 1.0 pence per share paid in July, gives  
a full year dividend of 3.4 pence per share.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201353

Interests in voting rights
In accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6(2)(a), the following investor 
interests have been disclosed to the Company pursuant to the 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules (“DTR“): 

As at 31 August 2013:

% of issued  
share capital  
(excluding shares  
held as treasury 
shares)

20.02

7.19

5.36

4.94

Number  
of shares 

248,368,031

89,183,155

66,480,510

61,358,602

Shareholder

Schroders

Milestone Resources  
Group Ltd

Majedie Asset  
Management Ltd

Bestinver Gestion,  
S.A.

In accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6 (2)(b), the following 
notifications have been received during the period  
1 September 2013 to 11 October 2013:

Date of 
notification

17/9/2013

Shareholder 

Majedie Asset  
Management Ltd

Number  
of shares

60,805,070

19/9/2013

BlackRock Inc

62,539,048

23/9/2013

GIC Private Ltd

37,156,695

24/9/2013

BlackRock Inc

N/A

07/10/2013

Schroders

243,990,254

% of issued  
share capital  
(excluding shares  
held as treasury  
shares)

4.92

5.06

3.01

below 5%  
threshold

19.83

Share buyback programme
The Company commenced its share buyback programme in  
April 2012. As at 31 August 2013 the Company has purchased 
47,441,877 ordinary shares of 0.01p at a total cost of £45.2 million. 
of which 23,882,722 ordinary shares of 0.01p per share were 
purchased (representing 1.9% of the Company’s share capital)  
at a cost of £25.1 million during the last financial year. All shares 
purchased by the Company are being transferred to treasury. 
655,573 treasury shares were transferred out of treasury during 
the year to satisfy awards granted under the Company’s share 
plans. Approval will be sought from shareholders at the 
forthcoming Annual General Meeting to renew the annual 
authority to purchase shares. 

Share capital and control
The issued share capital of the Company and the number of 
shares held in treasury as at 31 August 2013 are shown in note 27 
to the financial statements starting on page 121. In addition to the 
shares trading on the London Stock Exchange, the Company 
operates a Level 1 ADR programme. Each ADS represents four 
ordinary shares of 0.01p each. There are no known arrangements 
which may restrict the transfer of shares or voting rights.

The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to exercise  
voting rights, to receive dividends, to receive all shareholder 
communications and to attend and speak at general meetings  
of the Company. All the shares rank pari passu. These rights 
and the obligations attaching to the Company’s ordinary shares,  
in addition to those conferred on their holders by law, are set out 
in the Company’s Articles of Association, a copy of which can be 
obtained by writing to the Company Secretary. The Debenhams 
Retail Employee Trust 2004 (the “Trust“) holds 808,655 ordinary 
shares in the Company (0.06%). Of those shares, 335,118 shares 
are invested shares held by the Trust on behalf of the participants 
of the Deferred Bonus Matching Plan who exercise voting rights 
in relation to those shares. Any voting or other similar decisions 
relating to the balance of shares held by the Trust are taken by 
the trustees, who may take account of any recommendations 
of the Company.

There are no significant agreements to which the Company is a 
party which take effect, alter or terminate in the event of change 
of control of the Company except that the supplier agreements 
with certain major cosmetic suppliers contain termination 
provisions on change of control and the multicurrency credit 
facility dated 16 July 2010 (as amended by supplemental 
agreements dated 13 July 2011 and 22 May 2012) contains 
mandatory prepayment. There are no agreements providing for 
compensation for directors or employees on change of control. 
Details concerning the impact on share options and share awards 
held by directors or employees in the event of a change of control 
are set out on page 73 of the directors’ remuneration report.

Essential contracts
Debenhams has contractual arrangements with many 
organisations, but no one contract is so material as to be essential 
to our business, with the exception of the warehouse operators 
and the e-commerce platform provider.

Employees
Debenhams directly employs around 30,000 people in the UK, 
Republic of Ireland, Hong Kong and Denmark with thousands 
more employed by our partners in our franchise stores worldwide 
and within our supply chain. 

In December 2012, the Company launched “Your Voice“, a survey 
which gave our employees in the UK and the Republic of Ireland 
the opportunity to share their opinions and feedback about 
working for Debenhams. The aim of the survey was to identify 
priority areas to improve employee engagement and ultimately 
drive business performance. The results of the first survey, which 
provided a benchmark to measure progress in future surveys, 
were evaluated by market leaders in engagement surveys, ETS. 
The results were very positive with 77% of employees feeling 
engaged working at Debenhams and actions plans are being 
implemented across divisions within the business to address the 
key concerns of our employees. 

Business information and key messages are cascaded to  
all employees throughout the business via personal briefings  
and email. Briefings are also held by the Chief Executive and 
members of the executive committee to update employees on 
the performance of the Company and the Company’s strategy. 
The Employee Consultation Forum, which is attended by elected 
representatives from stores and head office, is another medium 
by which employees receive information on the Company as well 
as giving employees the opportunity to be consulted on certain 
activities of the business. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 54

Directors’ report continued

Going concern
After making enquiries, the directors consider that the Group has 
adequate resources to continue in operation for the foreseeable 
future. For this reason, they have adopted the going concern 
basis in preparing the financial statements.

Corporate governance statement
In accordance with DTR 7.2.1R, the disclosures required by 
DTR 7.2.2R to DTR 7.2.7R and DTR 7.2.10R are within the corporate 
governance report and directors’ remuneration report on  
pages 55 to 82 and risk review on pages 42 to 51 and are therefore 
incorporated into this report by reference.

Disclosure of information to auditors
Each of the directors of the company at the time when the 
directors’ report was approved confirms that:

a) So far as the director is aware, there is no information needed 
by the Company’s auditors in connection with preparing their 
report of which the Company’s auditors are unaware; and

b) S/He has taken all the steps that s/he ought to have taken  

as a director in order to make herself or himself aware of any 
information needed by the Company’s auditors in connection 
with preparing the report and to establish that the Company’s 
auditors are aware of that information.

Independent Auditors
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have indicated their willingness  
to continue in office and a resolution dealing with their 
reappointment as auditors of the company will be proposed  
at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

Annual General Meeting
The Annual General Meeting of Debenhams plc will be held at 
Debenhams’ Registered Office, 10 Brock Street, Regent’s Place, 
London NW1 3FG on Tuesday 10 December 2013 at 2.00pm.  
The Notice is given, together with explanatory notes, in the 
booklet which accompanies this report.

By order of the board

Paul Eardley 
Company Secretary
24 October 2013

Debenhams is committed to ensuring that employees  
or applicants for employment are treated equally regardless  
of gender, race, ethnic or national origin, religious, political or 
philosophical beliefs, disability, marital or civil partnership status, 
sexual orientation, gender reassignment and age. Through our 
equal opportunities policy we aim to create an environment that 
offers all employees the chance to use their skills and talents.

As part of the Company’s policy on equality of opportunity, 
decisions on recruitment, training, promotion, pay terms and 
conditions and leavers are based solely on objective, job-related 
criteria and personal competence and performance. The 
Company seeks wherever possible to make reasonable 
adjustments to ensure that an employee who becomes disabled 
during the course of his or her employment is able to continue 
working effectively. This includes providing equipment or altering 
working arrangements; providing additional training; reallocating 
on a temporary or permanent basis some of the employee’s 
duties to other members of staff; transferring the employee  
to a suitable alternative role; and adjusting working times. Any 
such adjustment will be monitored and reviewed on a regular 
basis to ensure it continues to be effective.

Payment of suppliers 
It is the Company’s policy to pay suppliers in accordance with  
the agreed payment terms provided that the invoice is properly 
presented and not subject to dispute.

The ratio, expressed in days, between the amounts owed by  
the Company to trade creditors at the end of the year and  
the amounts invoiced by suppliers in the financial year ended  
31 August 2013 was nil days (2012: nil days). The ratio, expressed 
in days between the amounts owed by the Group to trade 
creditors and the amount invoiced by suppliers in the financial 
year ended 31 August 2013 was 60 days (2012: 59 days).

Financial instruments
Debenhams does not enter into financial instruments for 
speculative trade. Details of financial instruments entered into  
for underlying risks are set out in note 22 on page 114.

Environment
The Company has been reporting greenhouse gas (GHG) 
emissions online to the Carbon Disclosure project since 2010.  
The Company also participates in the UK government’s CRC 
Energy Efficiency Scheme where Debenhams is in the top 
quartile of the CRC league table. Information on how the 
Company tackles climate change together with our latest CO2e 
emissions for Scope 1 (direct emissions), Scope 2 (purchased 
electricity) and Scope 3 (indirect emissions) can be found on our 
website, http://sustainability.debenhamsplc.com/managing-
climate-change/.

Charitable giving 
During the year the Group raised £1.2 million (2012: £0.75 million). 
Following a customer survey in 2012, “breast cancer“ and 
“children“ were identified as the causes closest to the hearts  
of our customers and so our charity strategy is mainly focused  
on these two areas. The Debenhams Foundation (“Foundation“) 
which was formally registered with the Charity Commission  
in June 2012 manages the donation of funds to charities 
supported by the Company. Further information on the 
Company’s charitable activities can be found on our website:  
http://sustainability.debenhamsplc.com/our-charity-achievements/. 
Key donations made by the Group and Foundation during the 
year were to the NSPCC (£193,000), ISPCC (£10,000), Breast 
Cancer Campaign (£97,000) Pink Ribbon Foundation (£36,000), 
Breakthrough Promotions Ltd (£91,000), Children in Need 
(£159,000) and the Estée Lauder MAC Aids campaign (£46,000).

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201355

Chairman’s introduction to governance 
Committed to high standards  
of corporate governance

Committed to a  
sustainable future 
Debenhams does not have a 
sustainability department. For us, 
being environmentally and socially 
responsible is embedded into the 
business and into everyone’s role. 

Learn more about our work in this area 
by visiting our sustainability website  
http://sustainability.debenhamsplc.com

or scan this QR code:

Dear shareholder
On behalf of the board, I am pleased to present the corporate governance report for the 
financial year ended 31 August 2013. As a UK listed company, Debenhams plc complies 
with the 2010 UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) and an explanation as to  
how we have applied the principles of the Code is set out in the corporate governance 
report. In September 2012, a number of changes were made to the Code and those 
changes are applicable to companies with a UK premium listing with financial years 
beginning on or after 1 October 2012. Debenhams will therefore report on its 
compliance with the 2012 version of the Code in its 2014 Annual Report and Accounts.

Has the board of Debenhams changed?
Debenhams has continued to focus on building the right board to support our four 
pillared strategy. As reported last year, Peter Fitzgerald joined us on 4 October 2012  
as an independent non-executive director. Growing our multi-channel business is a key 
part of Debenhams strategy and Peter’s experience in helping a retail business realise  
its online ambitions will be invaluable to Debenhams. Stephen Ingham joined the board 
in January this year and his experience in building an international business supports  
our strategy to expand the Debenhams brand internationally. 

What governance issues has the board focused on during the year?
The year has seen various changes to the narrative and remuneration reporting 
regulations. The board has therefore reviewed and discussed these new regulations  
and how they will impact Debenhams for 2014. In some instances we have chosen  
to embrace the regulations early – as evidenced by the new structure of the directors’ 
remuneration report. We have also performed board, committee, external auditors and 
benefits consultants performance evaluations during the year and details regarding the 
process and outcomes of those evaluations can be found on pages 60, 64, 66 and 81.

Why should you vote to re-elect your board?
In accordance with the Code, the board, its committees and each individual director  
will be evaluated by an external facilitator during 2014. For the last two years, I have 
personally reviewed the performance of each board member by conducting individual 
interviews. I can confirm that following the evaluation this year all of the directors continue 
to perform effectively and demonstrate commitment to their roles. Accordingly,  
the directors will offer themselves for re-election at the Annual General Meeting  
in December this year. Stephen Ingham will offer himself for election having been 
appointed to the board on 8 January 2013.

Nigel Northridge
Chairman

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 56

Board of directors 
Governed with experience

Nigel Northridge
Role: Chairman of the board and of the 
Nomination Committee. Nigel is also a 
member of the Remuneration Committee.

Michael Sharp
Role: Chief Executive since September 
2011, Deputy Chief Executive from 2008 
and Chief Operating Officer from 2006. 

Key strengths: Nigel has vast experience 
of a range of businesses in both an 
executive role and non-executive capacity. 
He spent 32 years with Gallaher Group plc 
including seven years as chief executive 
between 2000 and 2007 when he 
oversaw a successful sale of that business. 
In addition to his current non-executive 
roles, Nigel has also served as a non-
executive director of Aggreko plc and 
Thomas Cook Group plc.

External current directorships:  
Chairman of Paddy Power plc and 
a non-executive director of Inchcape plc.

Key strengths: Michael is one of the UK’s 
most experienced retailers and has spent 
his entire career in the industry. He has 
worked for Debenhams or its predecessor, 
the Burton Group, since 1985. Michael 
joined Debenhams in 1997 and was 
appointed to the board in 1999. Before 
this, his senior roles in the Burton Group 
included Managing Director of Principles 
and Racing Green and Buying and 
Merchandising Director of Topshop  
and Topman.

External current directorships:  
None.

Dennis Millard CA (SA), MBA
Role: Senior Independent Director since 
May 2010 following appointment as an 
independent non-executive director in 
May 2006. Dennis is also Chairman of the 
Remuneration Committee and a member 
of the Nomination and Audit Committees.

Key strengths: As chairman of another 
retail company, non-executive director  
of other UK public companies and past 
experience as a finance director, Dennis 
brings relevant and broad experience to 
his role as Senior Independent Director 
and Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee.

External current directorships:  
Chairman of Halfords Group plc and 
Smiths News PLC and a non-executive 
director of Premier Farnell plc.

Simon Herrick ACA
Role: Chief Financial Officer since 
January 2012.

Key strengths: Simon has strong  
financial experience gained in a range  
of companies and business environments. 
He previously held the role of Group 
Finance Director and Acting Chief 
Executive at Northern Foods plc and 
Finance Director of Kesa Electricals plc.

External current directorships:  
None.

Mark Rolfe FCA
Role: Independent non-executive director 
since October 2010. Mark is also chairman 
of the Audit Committee and a member  
of the Remuneration and Nomination 
Committees.

Key strengths: Mark is a chartered 
accountant and has considerable financial 
and accounting experience including  
20 years spent with Gallaher Group plc  
in various finance and executive roles 
including that of Finance Director. 

External current directorships:  
Non-executive director of Barratt 
Developments plc, Hornby plc and 
The Sage Group plc. He is also chairman  
of Lane, Clark & Peacock LLP. 

Sophie Turner Laing
Role: Independent non-executive director 
since August 2009 and a member of the 
Remuneration, Audit and Nomination 
Committees.

Key strengths: Sophie’s experience  
in management and media issues  
is invaluable to a consumer facing  
business like Debenhams. She is currently 
Managing Director, Content, at British Sky 
Broadcasting Group plc. Prior to joining 
Sky in 2003, Sophie held senior roles  
at the BBC and was a founder of HIT 
Entertainment.

External current directorships:  
Director of AETN UK and NGC Network 
International LLC. In addition, Sophie  
is a trustee of BAFTA, The Media Trust  
and the National Film & TV School.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201357

Martina King
Role: Independent non-executive director 
since August 2009 and a member of the 
Remuneration, Audit and Nomination 
Committees. Martina also chairs the 
Sustainability Committee.

Key strengths: Martina has accumulated 
extensive experience in management and 
marketing through holding a number of 
senior positions in marketing and online 
media including Managing Director of 
Aurasma, Yahoo! and Capital Radio. As 
Chief Executive Officer of Featurespace 
Limited, Martina also has data 
analytic experience.

External current directorships:  
Non-executive director of Capita plc and 
Cineworld Group plc and Chief Executive 
Officer of Featurespace Limited.

Peter Fitzgerald
Role: Independent non-executive director 
since October 2012 and a member of the 
Audit Committee.

Key strengths: Peter’s experience 
as a leading e-commerce executive is 
invaluable to Debenhams as we grow  
our multi-channel business. He is Country 
Sales Director for Google UK/Eire having 
worked for that business since 2007. From 
1999 to 2007 Peter worked for Amazon 
both in Europe and the USA. 

External current directorships:  
None.

Stephen Ingham
Role: Independent non-executive director 
since January 2013 and a member of the 
Remuneration Committee.

Key strengths: Stephen has been  
Chief Executive Officer of Michael Page 
International plc since 2006 having worked 
for that business since 1987. His experience 
of building an international business  
at Michael Page supports our strategy 
to expand the Debenhams 
brand internationally.

External current directorships:  
Chief Executive Officer of Michael  
Page International plc. Stephen is also  
a member of the Great Ormond Street 
Hospital’s Corporate Partnership.

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

Audit
Committee

Sustainability 
Committee

Committee membership

Nigel Northridge 
Michael Sharp 
Simon Herrick 
Mark Rolfe
Dennis Millard 
Martina King 
Peter Fitzgerald 
Sophie Turner Laing 
Stephen Ingham

 Committee membership 

 Committee chairman

Composition of the board

Length of tenure of non-executive directors

Directors 
Executive 
Non-executive 

No.
2
7

Directors 
Less than one year 
One to three years 
Three to six years 
More than six years 

No.
2
1
3
1

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 58

Corporate governance report 
An integrated approach

In accordance with the Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority, 
the Company confirms that throughout the year ended 31 August 
2013 and as at the date of this Annual Report it was compliant 
with all the relevant provisions as set out in the 2010 UK Corporate 
Governance Code (“the Code“) copies of which can be 
downloaded from the Financial Reporting Council website 
(see www.frc.org.uk).

Leadership
The board
The board of Debenhams is collectively responsible for the 
long-term success of the Company by directing and supervising 
the affairs of the Company and is accountable to its shareholders 
for the Group’s strategic aims, risk management and performance. 
No individual or small group of individuals dominate the board’s 
decision-making process. 

Biographical details of the board of directors are on pages 56  
to 57. The board currently has nine members; the chairman, six 
independent non-executive directors and two executive directors.

Chairman

Executive directors

Non-executive directors

Chief 
Executive

Chief 
Financial 
Officer

Senior 
Independent 
Director

Independent 
non-executive 
directors

Nigel 
Northridge

Michael 
Sharp

Simon 
Herrick

Dennis 
Millard

Peter 
Fitzgerald

Stephen 
Ingham

Martina  
King

Mark  
Rolfe

Sophie 
Turner Laing

The Chairman
The main responsibility of the chairman is the effective  
running of the board ensuring that all directors maximise their 
contributions in the development and implementation the 
Company’s strategy whilst ensuring that the nature and extent 
of the significant risks the company is willing to embrace in the 
implementation of its strategy is determined and challenged.  
The Chairman is also responsible for promoting the highest 
standards of corporate governance, the induction of new 
directors and their continual development and succession 
planning. The Chairman holds regular meetings with the non-
executive directors without the executive directors being present.

Nigel Northridge has been Chairman since April 2010 and 
is also the Chairman of the Nomination Committee.

The Chief Executive
The Chief Executive is responsible for the day-to-day 
management of the business and for developing and 
implementing the Group’s strategic aims. He is assisted 
by the executive committee which meets on a weekly basis. 
The Chief Executive does not hold any external directorships.

Michael Sharp has been Chief Executive since September 2011.

The Chief Financial Officer
The Chief Financial Officer is responsible for the financial 
reporting and management of the Debenhams Group.  
In addition to the finance, audit, tax and treasury teams,  
the Chief Financial Officer is also responsible for systems and 
logistics, legal and secretariat and investor relations. The Chief 
Financial Officer does not hold any external directorships.

Simon Herrick has been Chief Financial Officer since 
January 2012.

The Senior Independent Director
Any concerns which shareholders may have which are not 
appropriate for discussion through the normal channels of 
Chairman, Chief Executive or Chief Financial Officer would 
be dealt with by the Senior Independent Director. The Senior 
Independent Director also leads the Chairman’s appraisal, 
serves as an intermediary for the other directors with the 
Chairman as necessary and acts as a sounding board for 
the Chairman as required. 

Dennis Millard has been Senior Independent Director since 
May 2010 and is also chairman of the Remuneration Committee.

Executive committee

Michael Sharp 
Chief Executive

Simon Herrick 
Chief Financial Officer 

Suzanne Harlow
Group Trading Director

Mike Goring 
Retail Director 

Richard Cristofoli
Marketing Director

Nikki Zamblera
HR Director 

Financial reporting and 
management, tax, 
treasury, systems and 
logistics, legal and 
secretariat, internal audit 
and investor relations.

Design, buying, 
merchandising, distribution, 
sourcing, supply chain  
and external business.

UK and international  
store operations and  
store development.

Product marketing, 
advertising, PR, visual 
and creative, customer 
strategy and insight.

HR, pay and reward, 
learning & development, 
recruitment, pensions  
and facilities.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201359

Chairman’s responsibilities 
•  The effective running of the board ensuring the 

directors receive accurate and timely information to 
enable debate and high quality decision making

•  Promoting high standards of corporate governance

•  Ensuring the board agendas take full account of the 

important issues facing the Company and the concerns 
of all board members

•  Ensuring, as Chairman of the Nomination Committee, 

that there are board succession plans in place  
in order to retain and build an effective and 
complementary board

Chief Executive’s responsibilities 
•  Running the Company business

•  Implementing the business strategy

•  Regularly updating the board on progress against 

approved plans

•  Ensuring the Executive Committee complies with all 

business policies, delegated authorities and regulations 
in achieving the objectives of the businesses

Gender ratios

Board
 Male
Female

Senior management team
 Male
Female

Employee workforce
 Male
Female

%
78
22

%
56
44

%
24
76

Board experience 
Our board has a wealth of experience and expertise 
to govern and advise an international, multi-channel brand 
like Debenhams.

Consumer 
Number of directors with consumer experience: 9

Digital business
Number of directors with digital business experience: 5

International
Number of directors with international experience: 7

Marketing
Number of directors with marketing experience: 6

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report  
 
 
60

Corporate governance report continued

Performance evaluation 
This year an evaluation of the performance of the board, 
its committees and the individual directors was conducted 
internally. This was led by the Chairman who interviewed all 
board members individually and discussed the results 
collectively with the board. The Remuneration Committee 
evaluated the Committee advisors and the Audit Committee 
evaluated the external auditors. In addition, the non-executive 
directors evaluated the Chairman’s performance at a meeting 
chaired by the Senior Independent Director.

Non-executive directors
As detailed in their biographies on pages 56 to 57 our non-
executive directors have a diverse range of skills, experience  
and backgrounds. They provide constructive challenge  
and assistance in developing the Group’s strategy. All the 
non-executive directors are considered by the board to be 
independent and free from any relationship or circumstances 
that could affect their independent judgement. 

The table below details the length of service for the Chairman 
and each of our non-executive directors:

Director

Nigel Northridge

Dennis Millard

Martina King

Sophie Turner Laing

Mark Rolfe

Peter Fitzgerald

Stephen Ingham

Date of appointment

1 January 2010

9 May 2006

1 August 2009

1 August 2009

1 October 2010

4 October 2012

8 January 2013

Current length of service as a 
non-executive director at 31 August 2013

3 years 8 months

7 years 4 months

4 years 1 month

4 years 1 month

2 years 11 months

11 months

8 months

Board activity throughout the year

2
1
0
2
r
e
b
m
e
t
p
e
S

2
1
0
2
r
e
b
o
t
c
O

3
1
0
2
y
r
a
u
n
a
J

3
1
0
2
y
r
a
u
r
b
e
F

3
1
0
2

l
i
r
p
A

3
1
0
2
e
n
u
J

Presentation on 
women’s accessories 
performance

Presentation on  
lingerie performance

Property presentation

Annual strategy 
meeting

Approval of interim 
results and resolved to 
pay interim dividend

Presentation on logistics

Reviewed the marketing 
strategy

Met with shareholders 
at the Annual General 
Meeting

Approved full year 
results, report 
and accounts and 
recommended the  
final dividend

Debated and approved 
the corporate risk map

Reviewed the annual 
performance evaluation 
of the board and its 
committees

Reviewed budget

Reviewed investor 
perception study

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
 
 
 
 
 
 
61

Board induction 
To complement the Company’s induction programme,  
Amrop Augmentum (Amrop) was appointed to assist with  
the induction of Peter Fitzgerald. In addition to the operational 
items covered in Peter’s induction, the programme also 
covered finance, corporate governance, board behaviour, 
audit and risk issues. On legal and governance matters, Peter’s 
induction was dealt with by the Company Secretary with input 
from Allen & Overy as part of the Amrop programme.

The Company Secretary
The Company Secretary provides support to the board and 
its committees and advises the Chairman and the board on all 
corporate governance matters. All directors have access to the 
services of the Company Secretary and in addition may take 
independent professional advice at the Company’s expense 
in conducting their duties. 

The Chairman, together with the Company Secretary, ensures 
that the members of the board and its committees receive clear, 
comprehensive, up-to-date and timely information so that there 
can be thorough consideration of the issues prior to and 
informed debate and challenge at board and committee 
meetings. All information is published in advance via a secure 
web portal. If directors are not able to attend meetings due 
to conflicts in their schedule, they review the papers for 
consideration at that meeting and relay any comments to 
the Chairman in advance of the meeting where possible 
which are then passed on to the other directors.

Paul Eardley has been Company Secretary since October 2007.

Time commitment
All directors are aware of the need to allocate sufficient time 
to the Company to discharge their responsibilities effectively. 
The board monitors the extent of their external interests and any 
conflicts on a continuing basis. The letters of appointment for 
non-executive directors set out the time commitment expected 
to be necessary to perform their duties. The time required 
by directors will fluctuate depending on the demands of the 
business and other events but the expected number of days 
required for each non-executive director for meetings is ten days.

Induction and ongoing development
On appointment, a director is provided with an induction 
programme which is tailored to their listed company and retail 
experience. The induction includes the provision of relevant 
current and historical information about the Company together 
with applicable business policies. Meetings are arranged with 
advisors and visits to operations around the Group are arranged. 
One-to-one meetings are also held with members of the 
executive committee and other senior executives in the business 
as appropriate. Ongoing development is made available 
including specific training for Audit Committee members.

Directors’ conflicts of interest
The Nomination Committee annually reviews and considers the 
interests and other external appointments held by the members 
of the board. All conflicts declared were approved at its meeting 
in September. The directors have a continuing duty to inform the 
board of any potential conflicts immediately so that such conflicts 
may be considered and if authorised included within the register 
of conflicts. Debenhams plc recognises that the non-executive 
directors have other business interests outside of the Company 
and that other directorships bring significant benefits to the 
board. All existing directorships are detailed within the director 
biographies on pages 56 to 57. Non-executive directors are 
required to consult with the Chairman before accepting any 
further appointments. 

Indemnification of directors
Qualifying third party indemnity provisions (as defined in section 
234 of the Companies Act 2006) are in force for the benefit of the 
directors who held office during the year. The Company also 
provides insurance cover and indemnities for its directors. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 62

Corporate governance report continued

2013 board programme
The board held six meetings during 2013 which were fully 
attended by all the board members. In addition to the directors, 
board meetings were attended by the Retail Director, the HR 
Director, the Group Trading Director, the Marketing Director  
and the Company Secretary. 

Each board meeting covers presentations from the executive 
directors and from each of the other members of the executive 
committee. Presentations are also received on a rotating basis 
from the trading divisions and other business areas including 
investor relations, treasury, taxation and health and safety.  
In addition, the board receives regular updates on the key group 
risks and ensures that the risk management framework and profile 
supports the four pillared strategy. In accordance with the Code, 
there is a formal schedule of matters reserved for the board’s 
decision which is reviewed annually in October.

The board also holds an off site meeting annually in February 
to focus specifically on the Company’s strategy.

Board committees
The board committees are the Audit, Remuneration and 
Nomination Committees. The terms of reference (which are 
reviewed annually) of each committee can be found on our 
website at www.debenhamsplc.com. The members and the 
role of each committee are disclosed on pages 64, 65, 66, 79  
and 80 of this report. In addition there is a Sustainability 
Committee which is a committee of the board and is chaired  
by Martina King. Details of the role and achievements of  
the Sustainability Committee are available on our website:  
http://sustainability.debenhamsplc.com. 

Share capital and control
Information which the directors are required to provide pursuant 
to Section 992 of the Companies Act 2006 can be found on page 
53 of the directors’ report. 

Shareholder engagement
The board is responsible for ensuring that the Company 
maintains a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders. 
The Chairman and the Senior Independent Director are always 
available to major shareholders. Formal trading updates are 
given to the market on 6 occasions during the year. Following 
each of these announcements, conference calls are held with 
shareholders and analysts and after the full year and interim 
results a presentation is made to the shareholders and analysts. 
Analysts or brokers’ briefings are circulated to the board. 
A programme of meetings and conference calls is also organised 
at appropriate times during the year at which the Chief Executive 
and Chief Financial Officer comment on Company performance 
and respond to any issues raised by investors. In addition 
Debenhams arranges visits to its stores for analysts and 
shareholders and holds regular capital markets days dedicated 
to specific pillars of the strategy.

The major shareholders of the Company are listed on page 53 
of the directors’ report.

Investor relations calendar

2
1
0
2
r
e
b
m
e
t
p
e
S

2
1
0
2
r
e
b
o
t
c
O

2
1
0
2
r
e
b
m
e
v
o
N

3
1
0
2
y
r
a
u
n
a
J

3
1
0
2
y
r
a
u
r
b
e
F

3

1

0

2

h

c

r

a

M

3

1

0

2

l

i

r

p

A

3

1

0

2

y

a

M

Capital markets day:
 “Focusing on UK retail“

Full year results presentation

US shareholder roadshow

First half interim management 
statement

European shareholder 
roadshows

First half trading update

First half results

US shareholder roadshow

Capital markets day: “Oxford Street 

3

1

0

2

e

n

u

J

transformation“

Full year trading update

UK shareholder roadshow

European shareholder 
roadshows

AGM

UK shareholder roadshow

Second half interim  

management statement

Capital markets day: 
“Delivering a compelling 
customer proposition“

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
63

Shareholders by geography 

January 2013 AGM – key highlights
•  Full director attendance

•  805.6 million to 899.7 million votes cast 

for each resolution

•  All directors retired and were re-elected 
to the board receiving at least 98.4% of 
votes cast in favour

•  Remuneration report resolution passed 

with 99.36% of votes cast in favour 

England  
USA 
UAE 
Scotland 
Singapore  
Spain 
Norway 
Other 

%
59
15
7
4
3
3
3
6

Latest investor information 
You can find all our latest investor news 
and financial reports online, as well as 
our financial calendar and regulatory 
announcements. You can also monitor 
the share price and calculate the value 
of your shareholding.

Visit our investor relations  
section of our website  
http://debenhamsplc.com

or scan this QR code:

2

1

0

2

r

e

b

m

e

t

p

e

S

Capital markets day:

 “Focusing on UK retail“

2

1

0

2

r

e

b

o

t

c

O

2

1

0

2

r

e

b

m

e

v

o

N

3

1

0

2

y

r

a

u

n

a

J

3

1

0

2

y

r

a

u

r

b

e

F

statement

roadshows

Full year results presentation

US shareholder roadshow

First half interim management 

European shareholder 

First half trading update

First half results

US shareholder roadshow

Capital markets day: “Oxford Street 
transformation“

3
1
0
2
h
c
r
a
M

3
1
0
2

l
i
r
p
A

3
1
0
2
y
a
M

3
1
0
2
e
n
u
J

Full year trading update

UK shareholder roadshow

European shareholder 

AGM

roadshows

UK shareholder roadshow

Second half interim  
management statement

Capital markets day: 

“Delivering a compelling 

customer proposition“

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
64

Corporate governance report continued

Nigel Northridge
Chairman, Nomination Committee
“Board appointments are 
made against objective 
criteria to support the 
four pillars of our 
strategy to build a 
leading international, 
multi-channel brand.”

Nomination Committee

The membership of the Nomination Committee, together with appointment dates and 
attendance at meetings is set out below:

Members
Nigel Northridge (Chairman)
Martina King
Dennis Millard
Mark Rolfe
Sophie Turner Laing

Date appointed 
committee member 
1 April 2010
1 May 2010
9 May 2006
1 October 2010
1 May 2010

Attendance at 
meetings during year
3/3
3/3
3/3
3/3
3/3

Main activities during the year
•  Recommended the appointment of Peter Fitzgerald and Stephen Ingham

•  Reviewed its terms of reference and its own effectiveness

•  Conducted a review of the board size and composition and the composition 

of the committees 

•  Reviewed the time commitment and length of service of the Chairman and each 

non-executive director

•  Monitored directors’ conflicts of interest 

The Committee is scheduled to hold one meeting a year. As shown above, 
the Committee met on a quorate basis on two further occasions. Other attendees 
who may be invited to attend for all or part of any meeting are the Chief Executive, 
the HR Director and external advisers. The Company Secretary also attends meetings 
in his capacity of Secretary of the Committee. 

Board and committee changes
During the year the board composition was enhanced by the appointments of  
Peter Fitzgerald and Stephen Ingham as independent non-executive directors.  
Peter Fitzgerald joined the board in October 2012 and brings a wealth of experience  
in online retailing. Stephen Ingham was appointed in January 2013 and we look forward 
to his contribution with regard to our international expansion. Peter is a member  
of the Audit Committee and Stephen a member of the Remuneration Committee.

Both appointments were facilitated by external search consultants, the Miles Partnership 
in respect of Peter and the Lygon Group in respect of Stephen, who provided a shortlist 
of candidates for consideration by the Committee. The candidates selected by the 
Committee were then interviewed by the majority of the board. The Committee, having 
assessed the candidates following feedback from the interviewees and against objective 
criteria, then recommended the potential candidate to the board. When recruiting 
non-executive directors, the Committee takes into account the board size, structure and 
composition having regard to the balance of skills, knowledge, experience and diversity 
of psychological type, background and gender so as to ensure that the board is well 
balanced and appropriate for the needs of the business. The board’s policy on diversity 
will be formalised during 2014 and will be disclosed in next year’s annual report.

Committee evaluation
The annual evaluation of the Committee’s effectiveness was undertaken by the 
Chairman and it was concluded that the Committee continues to operate effectively.

As last year, the Nomination Committee is, in line with the 2010 UK Corporate 
Governance Code, recommending that the directors of the Company stand  
for re-election/election at the next Annual General Meeting. 

Nigel Northridge
Chairman, Nomination Committee

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201365

Mark Rolfe
Chairman, Audit Committee

“The Audit Committee 
comprises members with 
a broad range of business 
and financial experience 
to fulfil its programme 
of work effectively.”

Audit Committee

The Membership of the Audit Committee, together with appointment dates and 
attendance at meetings, is set out below:

Members 
Mark Rolfe
(Committee Chairman) 

Peter Fitzgerald
Martina King
Dennis Millard
Sophie Turner Laing

Date appointed 
committee member
1 October 2010 
(appointed Committee Chairman 
2 September 2012)
18 October 2012
1 August 2009
9 May 2006 
1 May 2010

Attendance at 
meetings during year
3/3

2/2*
3/3
3/3
3/3

*  Peter Fitzgerald was invited to join the Audit Committee in October 2012 and therefore was only eligible 

to attend two meetings during the period.

Main activities during the year
•  Recommended to the board the approval of all financial statements 

released by the Company 

•  Monitored the effectiveness of the system of internal controls and 

risk management

•  Appointed a new external audit partner

•  Approved the external auditors’ plan and fees

•  Approved the internal audit plan

•  Reviewed the independence of the external auditors and the fees paid 

to them for non-audit work

•  Reviewed its terms of reference

Following a review by the board of the Audit Committee composition, it was decided 
that Peter Fitzgerald be appointed to the Audit Committee. The Committee comprises 
members with a broad range of business and financial experience to fulfil its programme 
of work effectively. The board regards Dennis Millard and myself to have recent and 
relevant financial experience. 

As usual, our activities this year have included financial reporting, risk management, 
monitoring internal controls and reviewing and approving external and internal audits. 
We have also considered the changes to the Corporate Governance Code which will 
apply to Debenhams in 2014 relating to financial reporting and audit and the guidance 
on Audit Committees issued by the Financial Reporting Council in September 2012. 

The Committee met three times during the financial year. In addition to the members 
of the Committee, the Chairman, the Chief Financial Officer, the Director of Internal 
Audit and Risk and senior representatives of the Company’s external auditors, 
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, attended and received papers for each meeting. 
The Group Treasurer and Head of Personal Finance and the Head of Tax delivered an 
annual presentation to the Committee. The Company Secretary, who is supported on 
this committee by the Deputy Company Secretary, attends all meetings in his capacity 
as Secretary of the Committee but also reports on any material litigation and corporate 
governance issues including an ongoing review of external auditor independence.  
After each meeting the Chairman reports to the board on the matters discussed,  
on recommendations and on actions to be taken.

The Committee also met privately with the Company’s external auditors twice  
during the year and once with the Director of Internal Audit and Risk and the Chief 
Financial Officer. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 66

Corporate governance report continued

The Committee’s primary 
responsibilities are 
to monitor the integrity 
of financial statements, 
review changes in 
accounting principles, 
review internal and external 
audit activity and monitor 
effectiveness of the risk 
management and internal 
control environment.

Audit Committee continued

Our responsibilities
The Audit Committee’s primary responsibilities are to monitor the integrity of financial 
statements (including any related information presented with the financial statements) 
and any formal announcements relating to the Company’s financial performance, 
to review any changes in accounting principles and consider the appropriateness of 
accounting policies adopted by the Company, review the Group’s internal and external 
audit activity and to review and monitor the effectiveness of the risk management  
and internal control systems within the business. 

External auditors’ independence
In order to ensure that an appropriate relationship is maintained with the external 
auditors, a policy on auditor independence has been established and is reviewed 
annually. The policy covers matters such as that auditors and their staff must have no 
family, financial, employment, investment or business relationship with the Company, 
the employment by the Company of former audit employees, the rotation of audit 
partners and the provision of non-audit services. The Audit Committee makes 
recommendations to the board in respect of re-appointment annually for inclusion 
in the Notice of Annual General Meeting. As regards the risk of the external auditors 
withdrawal from the market, the Company considers that there are sufficient other 
auditors in the market place should this situation ever arise.

The objective of the Audit Committee’s policy in relation to the provision of non-audit 
services by the auditors is to ensure that the provision of such services does not impair 
the external auditors’ independence or objectivity. An independent report is produced 
each quarter during the year detailing all non-audit work, its cost, when it was carried 
out and who instructed it. This information is reported to the Audit Committee at each 
meeting by the Company Secretary.

The Company’s policy identifies three categories of accounting services. The first 
category is audit-related services which the auditors are permitted to provide. The 
second category is prohibited services which the auditors are not permitted to provide. 
Prohibited services are those which might result in the external auditor auditing its  
own work, or making management decisions for the Company, and those where some 
mutuality of interest is created or where the external auditor is put in the role of advocate 
for the Company. The third category is “potential“ services which the auditors may,  
in certain circumstances, provide subject to compliance with the independence policy. 
These services include tax advisory services or services where the auditors are acting 
as the Company’s reporting accountant.

£0.2 million was paid by the Company to PricewaterhouseCoopers for non-audit 
services in respect of advisory services. The audit fees paid by the pension schemes 
were £30,700. 

External auditors’ evaluation
The performance evaluation of PricewaterhouseCoopers was conducted internally 
through the circulation of a questionnaire to members of the Audit Committee and to 
key customers within the business. The results of the evaluation were very satisfactory.

External auditors’ appointment
In accordance with auditing standards and to protect independence and objectivity, 
Martin Hodgson, the current audit partner who has served on the Debenhams account 
for the last five years, was succeeded at the start of the new financial year, 1 September 
2013, by John Ellis. Mr Ellis has already conducted a review of the external audit plan 
for 2014 and is undergoing an induction programme with the Company to enhance  
his knowledge of Debenhams’ business. 

Having considered the external auditors’ performance, effectiveness, resource, 
objectivity, independence, including the extent of non-audit services provided, 
the Committee has recommended to the board that PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, 
who have served as auditors of the Company since May 2006, be re-elected auditors 
for 2014.

Mark Rolfe
Chairman, Audit Committee

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201367

Introduction to Remuneration Committee
Embracing transparent  
remuneration reporting 

Remuneration Committee:
Main activities during the year
•  Reviewed revised reporting 

regulations and prepared a new look 
directors’ remuneration report

•  Reviewed performance against 

targets for the executive directors’ 
2013 bonuses 

•  Reviewed the executive remuneration 

strategy for 2014

•  Approved the executive directors’ 

bonus plan for 2014

•  Reviewed its terms of reference

•  Reviewed the Company pension 

contribution for the Chief Executive

Dear shareholder
On behalf of the Remuneration Committee, I am pleased to present our remuneration 
report for 2013. The new remuneration reporting regulations do not apply to 
Debenhams until 2014. However, the Committee decided to include a number of the 
required disclosures this year to improve transparency and enhance the quality of our 
communication with shareholders. We hope shareholders find this new format useful. 

We have made good progress this year in implementing our four pillar strategy 
to build a leading international, multi-channel brand:

•  Modernised and new stores are performing well

•  We have grown or maintained market share in all key categories

•  Online sales grew by 46.2%

•  International sales increased by 3.7% and six new franchise stores opened in the year 

including two new markets 

The retail marketplace, however, remains highly competitive and the profit before tax 
(PBT) target set for the 2013 annual bonus was not met. Threshold levels of like-for-like 
sales and gross margin performance were met, however, in light of the overall profit 
performance, the executive directors elected not to receive any bonus for 2013. 

The annual bonus criteria – PBT and like-for-like sales growth and gross margin 
performance – will remain unchanged but any pay-out in respect of the like-for-like sales 
growth and gross margin percentage matrix will be subject to meeting threshold levels 
of PBT performance. The executive directors have elected not to take a pay increase this 
year and the Committee concurred. PSP awards for 2014 will be made once targets have 
been finalised.

During the year, the Committee reviewed the Chief Executive’s pension allowance and 
determined that the current pension allowance of 15% of base salary was at the lower 
end of market practice compared to our retail peers and practice for the FTSE 250. 
The Committee therefore considered that it was appropriate to increase his pension 
allowance to 20% of base salary. 

The Committee continues to believe that executive remuneration arrangements 
are structured to support the delivery of our four pillar strategy and no changes are 
proposed at this time. The Committee will continue to keep the structure of 
remuneration arrangements under review.

Dennis Millard
Chairman, Remuneration Committee

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 68

Remuneration policy

Remuneration at a glance

Salary

Annual 
bonus

PSP

Chief Executive – £615,000 
CFO – £410,000

Maximum of 100% of base salary

Chief Executive – Usual award of 150% of base salary 
CFO – Usual award of 100% of base salary

Pension 
allowance

Chief Executive – A cash payment of 20% of base salary 
CFO – A cash payment of 15% of base salary

Benefits

Flexible benefits allowance and other core benefits

80% based on PBT. 
20% based on a performance matrix of like-for-like sales growth 
and gross margin percentage performance.

75% of the award granted may vest dependent on EPS 
performance and 25% dependent upon ROCE performance 
versus cost of capital. Both performance metrics are measured 
over a three year performance period.

Introduction 
This remuneration report for the year ended 31 August 2013, 
complies with the requirements of the Listing Rules of the UK 
Listing Authority, Schedule 8 of the Large and Medium-Sized 
Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 
and the provisions of the 2010 UK Corporate Governance Code. 

Although Debenhams is not formally required to comply with the 
new executive remuneration reporting regulations (The Large 
and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and 
Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013) until the year ending 
30 August 2014, we have provided additional disclosure in 
anticipation of the new requirements in order to help our 
shareholders better understand our remuneration policy 
and practice. 

This report will be put to an advisory shareholder vote 
at the Annual General Meeting in December 2013.

Directors’ remuneration policy 
Link between remuneration and strategy 
Our executive remuneration policy has been designed to support 
our Group strategy: 

•  Reward philosophy – Our reward philosophy is that 

remuneration arrangements should be set at a level that 
is sufficient to recruit and retain an individual of the calibre 
required to run the business without paying more than 
is necessary to do so. 

•  Alignment with our business strategy – Remuneration 

structures are designed to support the business strategy with 
the majority of the remuneration package being linked to the 
delivery of performance, paid in a combination of cash and 
shares. Short-term and long-term performance measures have 
been selected to be aligned with the delivery of the four pillars 
of our business strategy. These are an annual focus on 
profitability and increasing sales volume while improving 
margin, and a long-term focus on growing earnings and 
delivering a sustainable level of return on capital. Market 
conditions are also taken into consideration when setting pay. 

•  Alignment with shareholders – Variable remuneration 

opportunity is delivered in Debenhams shares through the 
PSP and through the annual bonus. The Committee operates 
a shareholding guideline policy for executive directors which 
aligns the interests of executives with our shareholders and 
demonstrates the executives’ on-going commitment to 
the business. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201369

Remuneration policy table
The table below sets out a summary of our remuneration policy for executive directors:

Element 

Base salary 

Purpose and link to 
remuneration policy 

Key features / operation

•  Supports the recruitment 
and retention of executive 
directors of the calibre 
required to fulfil the role 
without paying more than 
is necessary to do so

•  Paid in cash
•  Normally reviewed annually
•  In determining base salaries, 
the committee considers: 
 – Pay levels at companies of  

•  Rewards executives for the 
performance of their role 

a similar size and complexity 
and other FTSE 350 retailers

 – External market conditions
 – Pay and conditions elsewhere 

in the Group

 – Contribution to corporate 

performance

 – Personal performance

What is the maximum 
potential value?

•  The Committee’s policy 
is to set base salary at an 
appropriate level taking 
into account the factors 
outlined in this table
•  Current salaries are:
 – Chief Executive – 

£615,000

 – CFO – £410,000

•  No base salary 

increases were awarded 
to executive directors from 
1 September 2013

Performance metrics 

N/A

Pension 

•  Provides funds to 

•  In determining pension 

allow executives to save 
for retirement
•  Provides a market 

competitive retirement 
benefit

•  Incentive and retention 

tool 

arrangements, the Committee 
takes into account relevant market 
practice and practice throughout 
the Group 

•  Executive directors are provided 

a cash allowance in lieu of a 
pension provision

•  The Chief Executive is a deferred 

member of the Debenhams 
Executive Pension Plan and he 
ceased to accrue benefits under 
that plan on 31 March 2006 

N/A

•  The Chief Executive’s cash 
pension allowance is 20% 
of base salary with the cash 
pension allowance for the 
CFO being set at 15% of 
base salary

Benefits 

•  To provide a market-
competitive level  
of benefits for  
executive directors

•  Executive directors have a 

N/A

N/A

benefits allowance which can be 
used to fund a range of benefits. 
This approach is used also for the 
wider management population
•  Executive directors receive life 
assurance. The Chief Executive 
also receives a financial planning 
allowance, travel allowance and  
a fuel card

•  Executive directors are eligible to 
receive a staff discount in line with 
other senior executives
•  Executive directors may 

participate in any all employee 
share plans which may be 
operated by the Company on the 
same terms as other employees
•  The Committee may determine 
that executive directors should 
receive other reasonable benefits 
if appropriate taking into account 
typical market practice

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 70

Remuneration policy continued

Element 

Purpose and link to 
remuneration policy 

Annual bonus 

•  Rewards and incentivises 

the achievement of annual 
financial objectives which 
are aligned with key 
strategic goals and 
supports the enhancement 
of shareholder value

Key features / operation

•  Paid in cash following year end
•  Bonuses are not pensionable

What is the maximum 
potential value?

•  Maximum opportunity of 

100% of base salary

•  The bonus starts accruing 
from threshold levels of 
performance

Performance 
Share Plan 
(“PSP”) 

•  Incentivises executives  
to achieve Debenhams’ 
long-term strategy and 
create sustainable 
shareholder value

•  Enhances shareholder 
value by motivating  
growth in earnings and 
maintenance of an efficient 
and sustainable level of 
return on capital

•  Aligns with shareholder 
interests through the 
delivery of shares

•  Acts as a retention tool

•  Awards vest after three years 

based on Group financial targets
•  Awards can be in the form of free 
shares or 0.01p options. Where 
awards are in the form of 0.01p 
options, participants have six 
months from vesting to exercise 
awards

•  Maximum plan award  
of 200% of base salary 
(250% of base salary in 
exceptional circumstances) 

•  Usual award levels are: 

 – Chief Executive: 150%  

of base salary

 – CFO: 100% of base 

salary

•  30% of award vests for 

target levels of 
performance

Performance metrics 

•  Bonus payouts 100% based 
on financial metrics – 80% 
based on PBT and 20% 
based on a matrix of 
like-for-like sales growth 
and gross margin 
percentage performance

•  The Committee 

determines appropriate 
performance metrics to 
support the annual 
business strategy, external 
expectations and the 
enhancement of 
shareholder value 

•  Targets are set 

by the Committee 
on an annual basis

•  PSP awards are subject to 

a combination of EPS (75%) 
and ROCE (25%)

•  The Committee sets three 
year performance targets 
each year, taking into 
account the business plan, 
external expectations and 
market practice 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201371

The table below sets out details of other plans that the Company has in place. It is not currently intended that these plans will be 
operated during 2014. However, the Committee retains the discretion to operate these plans if it considers it to be appropriate and in 
the best interests of shareholders.

Element 

Deferred Bonus 
Matching Plan 
(“DBMP”)

Purpose and link to 
remuneration policy 

•  Incentivises executives 
to achieve Debenhams’ 
long-term strategy and 
create sustainable 
shareholder value

•  Aligns executives’ interests 
with shareholders through 
the investment of their cash 
bonus into shares

Executive Share 
Option Plan 
(“ESOP”)

•  Incentivises executives 
to achieve Debenhams’ 
long-term strategy 
and create sustainable 
shareholder value

Key features/operation

•  The Committee can invite 

participants to invest up to 100% 
of their net bonus into shares
•  If the participant remains in 
employment and retains the 
invested shares for three years 
they may receive matching shares 
of up to the gross amount of the 
bonus deferred subject to 
performance conditions being 
met over a three year period

•  Market value share options
•  Three year vesting period 
•  10 year exercise period from 

the date of grant

•  Options can be granted in the 
form of unapproved options 
or HM Revenue & Customs 
approved options (up to the 
prescribed HMRC limit, 
currently £30,000)

What is the maximum 
potential value?

•  The Committee would 
operate this plan when 
it considers it to be 
appropriate and in the best 
interests of shareholders

Performance metrics 

•  If this plan were operated, 
appropriate performance 
conditions would be 
determined by the 
Committee at the time 
of award

•  If this plan were operated, 
appropriate performance 
conditions would be 
determined by the 
Committee at the time 
of award

•  The Committee may 

operate this plan in the 
future if it considers it to be 
appropriate and in the best 
interests of shareholders
•  The maximum award that 
can be made under the 
plan is 100% of base salary. 
Options may, in exceptional 
circumstances, be granted 
with a market value in 
excess of this amount 
at the discretion of the 
Remuneration Committee

Recruitment remuneration arrangements 
In the event that the Company recruits a new executive director 
(either from within the organisation or externally) when 
determining appropriate remuneration arrangements, the 
Committee will take into consideration all relevant factors 
(including but not limited to quantum, the type of remuneration 
being offered and the jurisdiction the candidate was recruited 
from) to ensure that arrangements are in the best interests of 
both the Company and its shareholders without paying more 
than is necessary to recruit an executive of the required calibre. 

The Committee would generally seek to align the remuneration 
package offered with our remuneration policy outlined in the 
table above. However, the Committee retains discretion to make 
proposals on hiring a new executive director which are outside 
the standard policy. In the first year of appointment, the 
Committee may offer additional remuneration arrangements 
that it considers appropriate and necessary to recruit and retain 
the individual. Such remuneration may be made in the form 
of cash or share based awards which may vest immediately or 
at a future point in time. Vesting may be subject to performance 
conditions selected by the Committee. 

The Committee may make awards on appointing an executive 
director to “buy-out” remuneration arrangements forfeited on 
leaving a previous employer. In doing so the Committee will take 
account of relevant factors including any performance conditions 
attached to these awards, the form in which they were granted 
(e.g. cash or shares) and the time over which they would have 
vested. Generally buy-out awards will be made on a comparable 
basis to those forfeited.

In the event of recruitment, the Committee may also grant 
awards to a new executive director under the Listing Rule 9.4.2 
which allows for the granting of awards, specifically to facilitate, 
in unusual circumstances, the recruitment or retention of an 
executive director, without seeking prior shareholder approval.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 72

Remuneration policy continued

Remuneration outcomes in different performance scenarios
The charts below set out an illustration of the remuneration policy for 2014 in line with the remuneration policy. The charts provide 
an illustration of the proportion of total remuneration made up of each component of the remuneration policy and the value of 
each component.

Three scenarios have been illustrated for each executive director: 

Below threshold performance

Mid-range performance

Maximum performance

•  Fixed remuneration

•  No annual bonus payout 

•  No vesting under the Performance Share Plan

•  Fixed remuneration

•  50% annual bonus payout 

•  50% vesting under the Performance Share Plan 

•  Fixed remuneration

•  100% annual bonus payout 

•  100% vesting under the Performance Share Plan 

Fixed pay for 2013 comprised the following elements:

Chief Executive – Michael Sharp

CFO – Simon Herrick

Salary

£615,000

£410,000

Benefits

£36,896

£18,375

Pension

£123,000

£61,500

Total

£774,896

£489,875

•  Base salary is the base salary with effect from 1 September 2013 which remains unchanged from the prior year 

•  Benefits are the value of benefits for 2013 as disclosed in the emoluments table

•  Pension is based on the cash contribution of 20% of base salary for the Chief Executive (annualised for illustrative purposes) and 15% 

of base salary for the CFO 

The scenarios below do not take into account share price appreciation or dividends.  

Chief Executive 

Maximum
performance

Mid-range
performance

Below target
performance

33%

27%

40%

£2.31m

50%

20%

30%

£1.54m

100%

£0.77m

CFO

Maximum
performance

Mid-range
performance

Below target
performance

38%

31%

31%

£1.31m

54%

23%

23%

£0.90m

100%

£0.49m

0.0

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

0.0

0.3

0.6

0.9

1.2

1.5

£m

£m

Fixed

Short-term incentives (annual bonus)

Fixed

Short-term incentives (annual bonus)

Long-term incentives (PSP)

Long-term incentives (PSP)

Executive director service contracts 
Michael Sharp entered into a service agreement with the Company on 3 May 2006. His agreement is terminable by either party giving 
not less than 12 months’ written notice. If the Company terminates the employment without due notice, other than in circumstances 
such as gross misconduct or other immediate justifiable cause, the Company is required to make a payment equal to the aggregate 
of the executive director’s basic salary and the value of any contractual benefits for the notice period including any accrued but 
untaken holiday. 

Simon Herrick entered into a service agreement with the Company on 19 October 2011. His agreement is terminable by either 
party giving not less than 12 months’ written notice. If the Company terminates the employment without due notice, other than in 
circumstances such as gross misconduct or other immediate justifiable cause, the Company is required to make a payment equal 
to the executive director’s basic salary for the notice period including any accrued but untaken holiday.

The Committee generally seeks to apply practical mitigation in respect of termination payments where appropriate. 

The service agreements are available to shareholders to view on request from the Company Secretary.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Remuneration policy for non-executive directors
Fees for non-executive directors are set at an appropriate level 
to recruit and retain directors of a sufficient calibre without paying 
more than is necessary to do so.

Fees are set taking into account the following factors: the time 
commitment required to fulfil the role; typical practice at other 
companies of a similar size and complexity to Debenhams; and 
salary increases awarded to employees throughout the Group.

Our non-executive director fees policy is to pay a basic fee  
for membership of the board, and additional fees for the  
Senior Independent Director, chairmanship of a committee  
and membership of a committee to take into account the  
additional responsibilities and time commitment of these roles.  
The non-executive directors are also eligible for a staff discount. 

Fees are reviewed at appropriate intervals (normally once every 
year) by the board. There is no increase in fees planned for 2014. 

Our current fee policy is as follows:

•  Basic fee – £40,000

•  Senior Independent Director – £10,000

•  Committee chairmanship fee (Audit and Remuneration) – 

£10,000

•  Committee chairmanship fee (Sustainability) – £7,500

•  Committee membership fee (per committee) – £2,500

The fees for the Chairman’s role are set taking into account  
the time commitment of the role, the skills and experience  
of the individual and typical market practice for other companies 
of a similar size and complexity. The Chairman is also eligible 
for a staff discount. 

73

Incentive plan – leaver provisions 
In the event of cessation of employment, outstanding unvested 
awards typically lapse. However, the Committee may determine 
in certain exceptional circumstances, and in accordance with 
the plan rules, that awards/options may vest taking into account 
performance against targets and the time elapsed between 
grant and cessation of employment. 

Change of control 
Generally the rules of the Company’s share schemes provide 
that in the event of a change of control, awards/options would 
vest to the extent that the performance conditions (where 
applicable) are satisfied at the date of such event. Any such 
early vesting would generally be on a time pro-rata basis.

Considering employee remuneration arrangements
Debenhams employs a large number of colleagues in a variety 
of roles; from store sales advisors to sales directors, buyers and 
support staff, across a range of geographies. Our reward 
structure for executive directors to store sales advisors is built 
around a set of common reward principles but our reward 
framework is altered as necessary to suit the needs of the 
business for our different employee groups across the Company. 
Reward packages therefore differ taking into account a number 
of appropriate factors including seniority, impact on the business, 
local practice, custom and legislation.

The remuneration policy for the executive directors reflects 
the overall remuneration philosophy and principles of the 
wider Group. When determining remuneration policy and 
arrangements for executive directors, the Remuneration 
Committee considers pay and employment conditions elsewhere 
in the Group to ensure that pay structures from executive director 
to store manager are appropriately aligned and that levels of 
remuneration remain appropriate in this context. 

When considering salary increases for the executive directors,  
the Committee considers the general level of salary increase 
across the Group. Typically, salary increases will be aligned with 
those received elsewhere in the Group unless the Committee 
considers that specific circumstances require a different level 
of salary increase for executive directors.

The remuneration arrangements for the members of the 
executive committee who are not executive directors fall  
within the Committee’s remit ensuring a common approach  
to the design of reward and determining reward outcomes  
for the most senior people within the organisation.

Considering shareholder views
The Committee is committed to an on-going dialogue with 
shareholders and seeks shareholder views when any significant 
changes are being made to remuneration arrangements. Over 
the last few years the committee has consulted with shareholders 
regarding the use of the Deferred Bonus Matching Plan and 
the performance measures for the annual bonus plan and 
Performance Share Plan. The Committee takes into account 
the views of shareholders when formulating and implementing 
the policy.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 74

Remuneration policy continued

The table below sets out the fees payable to each director not performing an executive function in respect of 2013.

Director

Roles

Nigel 
Northridge 

Non-executive Chairman, Chairman 
of Nomination Committee, member 
of Remuneration Committee

Additional fees

Date of joining 
the Company 

1 January 
2010 

Basic fee

£175,000

Committee 
member fee

Committee 
Chairman fee

SID fee

Total

–

–

–

£175,000

£40,000

£5,000

£10,000

£10,000

£65,000

SID, Chairman of the Remuneration 
Committee, member of Audit and 
Nomination Committees

9 May  
2006

Chairman of the Sustainability 
Committee, member of Remuneration, 
Audit and Nomination Committees

1 August 
2009

Chairman of the Audit Committee, 
member of Remuneration and 
Nomination Committees

1 October 
2010 

1 August 
2009

4 October 
2012

Dennis 
Millard

Martina 
King 

Mark  
Rolfe

Peter 
Fitzgerald

Stephen 
Ingham 

Sophie 
Turner Laing 

Member of Remuneration, Audit 
and Nomination Committees

Member of Audit Committee

£40,000

£7,500

£40,000

£2,500

Member of Remuneration Committee 8 January 

£40,000

£2,500

2013

£40,000

£7,500

£7,500

£40,000

£5,000

£10,000

–

–

–

–

–

£55,000

£55,000

£47,500

£42,500

£42,500

–

–

–

Non-executive directors do not participate in the annual bonus 
plan or any long-term incentive plans.

Terms and conditions for Chairman and non-executive directors 
Nigel Northridge was appointed as a non-executive director 
of the Company on 1 January 2010 and became Chairman on 
1 April 2010. His appointment as Chairman is subject to the terms 
of a letter of appointment dated 28 January 2010 and his initial 
appointment was for three years ending on 31 March 2013. 
This was extended by mutual agreement for a further three years 
to 31 March 2016 and may be extended by further terms of three 
years by mutual agreement. 

The Chairman’s appointment may be terminated by the 
Company in accordance with the Company’s Articles of 
Association, the Companies Act 2006 or upon the Chairman’s 
resignation. In the event of early termination of contract there will 
be no payment for loss of office or for the unexpired appointment 
term. In addition to time commitment, the annual engagement 
fee and other business interests, the Chairman is permitted to 
hold other directorships provided that any such appointment 
does not interfere with his position at the Company.

The non-executive directors have letters of appointment from 
the Company covering matters such as duties, time commitment, 
fees and other business interests. The non-executive directors 
are appointed for an initial three years which may be extended for 
a further term of three years by mutual agreement. Both Martina 
King and Sophie Turner Laing have been appointed for a further 
three years to 31 July 2015 following the end of their initial 
engagement on 31 July 2012. Mark Rolfe has been appointed 
for a further three years to 1 October 2016 following the end 
of his initial engagement on 1 October 2013. Dennis Millard was 
appointed on 9 May 2006 and following two three-year terms 
his appointment has been extended on an annual basis. 

Non-executive director appointments may be terminated 
by the Company in accordance with the Company’s Articles 
of Association, the Companies Act 2006 or upon the director’s 
resignation. In the event of early termination of contract there will 
be no payment for loss of office or for the unexpired appointment 
term. Dennis Millard’s appointment may be terminated by either 
party giving one month’s notice. Mr Millard is not eligible for any 
payment in lieu of notice. 

All appointments are subject to the Company’s Articles 
of Association and the annual shareholders’ re-election. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201375

What did executive directors earn in respect of 2013?
The table below sets out a single figure of remuneration for each executive director for 2013. 

Base salary

Benefits Annual bonus

Michael Sharp – 
Chief Executive

Simon Herrick – 
CFO

2013

£615,000

£36,896

2013

£410,000

£18,375

Nil

Nil

Long-term incentives

PSP

N/A

N/A

ESOS Retirement benefits

Total

N/A

N/A

£102,500

£754,396

£61,500

£489,875

The following provides details of how the single number has 
been calculated:

•  Base salary – The executive directors elected not to take 

a pay increase this year.

•  Benefits – Executive directors receive a benefits allowance 
which can be used to purchase benefits under the Group 
scheme. In addition, the executive directors receive life 
assurance. The Chief Executive also receives a financial 
planning allowance, a travel allowance and a fuel allowance. 
The value of the benefits allowance and the additional benefits 
is included in the table above.

•  Annual bonus – The maximum bonus for the year was 100% 

of base salary. The bonus for the period was based on 80% PBT 
and 20% on a like-for-like sales growth and gross margin 
percentage matrix. 40% of salary would have been payable 
for meeting threshold levels of performance with the maximum 
bonus only being payable for achieving performance 
significantly in excess of this level. 

PBT targets were not met and therefore no portion of the 
annual bonus based on those targets paid out. Threshold 
levels of like-for-like sales growth and gross margin 
performance were met which triggered a bonus of 2% 
of salary. In light of the overall profit performance, however, 
the executive directors elected not to take any bonus for 2013.

Components of remuneration
The following chart provides a summary of the different elements 
of pay that will be operated for 2014. 

Fixed pay

Base salary +
benefits + pension

c.33%-100%
of total reward
(depending on
performance)

Short-term
performance

Long-term
performance

Performance
related pay

Cash bonus
1 year

100% financial
(80% PBT
and 20% LFL 
sales growth 
and gross 
margin matrix)

Performance
share plan
1 year

c. 0%-67% of
total reward
(depending on
performance)

75% EPS growth
25% ROCE

Base salary
Executive directors did not receive a salary increase with effect 
from 1 September 2013 in line with the executive committee.

•  PSP – No PSP awards were granted in 2010 and therefore 
no awards will vest in respect of performance delivered in 
the year.

Chief Executive

CFO

£615,000

£410,000

•  ESOP – No ESOP awards were granted in 2010 and therefore 
no awards will vest in respect of performance delivered in 
the year.

•  Retirement benefits – Michael Sharp is a deferred member 
of the Debenhams Executive Pension Plan. The increase in  
his accrued pension, calculated using the methodology set  
out in the revised remuneration reporting regulations, was nil. 
Mr Sharp received a cash contribution in lieu of pension of 15% 
of base salary from 2 September 2012 to 30 April 2013 and of 
20% of base salary from 1 May 2013 to 31 August 2013 (totalling 
£102,500). Simon Herrick received a cash contribution in lieu 
of pension of 15% of base salary (£61,500).

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 76

Remuneration policy continued

Annual bonus
The annual bonus for 2014 will be based on the same criteria 
as 2013 with 80% based on PBT and 20% on a matrix of like-for-
like sales growth and gross margin percentage performance.  
The Committee considers that these measures are the most 
appropriate to create a strong alignment with shareholder value 
creation and effectively incentivise executives to meet profit  
and like-for-like sales growth targets on an annual basis whilst 
ensuring focus on the level of gross margin. These criteria also 
create alignment with the longer term four-pillared strategy.  
The proportion of the bonus based on like-for-like sales growth 
and gross margin will only pay out if threshold performance is 
achieved under the PBT measure. In addition to considering 
performance against targets, the Committee will consider the 
overall quality of the Company’s financial performance when 
determining annual bonus payments. 

The Committee considers that EPS and ROCE versus the cost 
of capital are the most appropriate performance metrics for our 
business, as growing our earnings while maintaining an efficient 
and sustainable level of return on capital is a key strategic driver 
of business performance and is closely aligned with the creation 
of shareholder value. 

ROCE means profit before interest and tax excluding any pension 
credit or debit divided by consolidated balance sheet net assets 
excluding net debt, pension balances, corporation tax and 
deferred tax. Cost of capital is calculated based on the weighted 
average cost of capital as determined by the Committee 
following advice from the Company’s brokers.

In addition, in order for the award to vest the Remuneration 
Committee must be satisfied that the underlying financial 
performance of the Company over the performance period 
is sufficient to justify the vesting of the award. 

PBT  
LFL sales growth and 
gross margin matrix  

Should any performance condition not be met at the end of the 
relevant performance period, that portion of the award will lapse 
immediately without any opportunity to re-test the relevant 
performance condition.

Both the EPS and ROCE elements of the awards vest on a 
straight-line basis between 30% and 100% based on performance 
achieved between the threshold and maximum targets disclosed.

%
80

20 

2014 PSP awards
PSP awards for 2014 will be made once targets have been 
finalised. Details of the performance measures and targets 
will be provided in the RNS announcement released at the time 
of the grant of awards.

The maximum bonus opportunity will remain at 100% of 
base salary, payable in cash. The bonus will begin accruing for 
delivering threshold levels of performance with the maximum 
bonus only being payable on the delivery of performance 
significantly in excess of plan.

Debenhams’ Performance Share Plan (“PSP”)
It is intended that a PSP award will be granted to executive 
directors in 2014 with a face value of 150% of base salary for 
the Chief Executive and 100% of base salary for the CFO.

Performance for PSP awards granted in 2011 and 2012 was based 
on stretching earnings per share (EPS) and return on capital 
employed (ROCE) performance targets. This is illustrated below: 

0%

20%

40%

60%

80%

100%

EPS growth

ROCE vs cost of capital

75%

25%

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013 
77

2013 PSP awards
In November 2012, the Chief Executive received an award of 200% of base salary (994,341 shares with a face value of c.£1,230,000) and 
the CFO received an award of 100% of base salary (331,447 shares with a face value of c.£410,000).

Date of grant

Performance period

Performance measures

75% based on absolute 
EPS growth

25% based on ROCE 
performance vs. cost of capital

1 November 2012

2 September 2012 
to 29 August 2015

Threshold 
(30% vesting)

Absolute EPS growth of 
6% per annum

Average ROCE equal to 
the cost of capital plus 1%

Maximum  
(100% vesting)

Absolute EPS growth of 
12% per annum

Average ROCE equal to 
the cost of capital plus 5%

2012 PSP awards
The table below sets out the performance conditions for the 2012 PSP awards:

Date of grant

Performance period

Performance measures

75% based on absolute 
EPS growth

25% based on ROCE 
performance vs. cost of capital

1 November 2011

4 September 2011 
to 30 August 2014

Threshold  
(30% vesting)

Absolute EPS growth of 
6% per annum

Average ROCE equal to 
the cost of capital

Maximum  
(100% vesting)

Absolute EPS growth of 
12% per annum

Average ROCE equal to 
the cost of capital plus 5%

The Debenhams Deferred Bonus Matching Plan (the “DBMP”)
It is not intended to operate the DBMP this year unless 
exceptional circumstances arise that, in the Committee’s 
view, warrant the operation of this plan.

Debenhams’ Executive Share Option Plan (“ESOP”)
It is not intended to operate the ESOP this year unless 
exceptional circumstances arise that, in the Committee’s 
view, warrant the granting of options.

Debenhams 2006 Sharesave Scheme (the “Sharesave Scheme”)
Under the Sharesave Scheme, employees may be granted 
an option to acquire shares at a fixed exercise price. At the end 
of the savings period, the employee may either exercise the 
option within six months of the end of the savings period using 
the savings contributions and bonus accumulated or have the 
savings and bonus repaid. No options have been granted under 
this scheme and there is currently no intention to use the scheme.

The Debenhams Retail Employee Trust 2004 (the “Trust“)
The Debenhams Retail Employee Trust 2004 currently holds 
808,655 shares in the Company. 200,000 shares are held in the 
Trust to satisfy potential awards made under The Debenhams 
2008 Share Incentive Plan (a plan for employees who are not 
executive directors) and 335,118 represent the invested shares 
of participants of the DBMP. Dividends receivable on the shares 
held in the Trust which are not subject to the DBMP are waived 
on the recommendation of the Company.

Funding of share schemes
It is the Company’s current intention to satisfy any future 
requirements of its share schemes in a method best suited 
to the interests of the Company, either by utilising shares held 
as treasury shares, acquiring shares in the market or issuing new 
shares. Where the awards are satisfied by newly issued shares 
or treasury shares, the Company will comply with ABI guidelines 
on shareholder dilution. 

Current levels of shareholder dilution are 0.83% (2012: 0.69%) 
of share capital.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 78

Remuneration policy continued

Pension entitlements 
Michael Sharp participated in the Debenhams Executive Pension 
Plan until 2006 (a defined benefit plan) and is now a deferred 
member of this scheme. His normal retirement date under this 
plan is 31 March 2017. Michael Sharp is not entitled to any 
additional benefits if he retires prior to this date; any benefits 
drawn will be actuarially reduced to reflect early retirement. 
Full details are disclosed on page 82 of this report. 

During the year, the Committee reviewed the Chief Executive’s 
current remuneration package and pension allowance and 
determined that the current pension allowance of 15% of base 
salary was at the lower end of market practice compared to our 
retail peers and other FTSE 250 companies. The Committee 

therefore considered that it was appropriate to increase his 
pension allowance to 20% of base salary. The revised allowance 
is in-line with the level of pension allowance received by other 
senior executives at Debenhams of a similar age and with a 
similar length of service who historically participated in the 
defined benefit pension plan. In making this decision, the 
Committee considered the impact of the overall positioning of 
the package and the pay and conditions for other employees in 
the Group and determined that this increase was appropriate.

The CFO is entitled to a salary supplement in lieu of pension 
provision of 15% of base salary, in line with other senior 
executives who joined the Company since 2004. These amounts 
are disclosed in the directors’ emoluments table on page 81.

Directors’ shareholdings
The interests of the directors in the share capital of the Company as at 31 August 2013 are shown below.

Directors

Nigel Northridge

Michael Sharp

Simon Herrick

Peter Fitzgerald

Stephen Ingham

Martina King

Dennis Millard

Mark Rolfe

Sophie Turner Laing

Ordinary shares held 
as at 2 September 2012

Ordinary shares held 
as at 31 August 2013

Ordinary shares held 
as at 11 October 2013

100,000

5,954,579

26,250

0

0

10,000

69,445

30,000

20,000

100,000

6,360,067

34,900

0

0

10,000

69,455

30,000

20,000

100,000

6,360,067

34,900

0

0

10,000

69,455

30,000

20,000

Executive directors’ shareholding guidelines
In order to align the interests of executive directors with those of shareholders and to demonstrate the executive directors’ ongoing 
personal financial commitment to the business, the Committee introduced a shareholding guideline policy in 2012. Executive 
directors are expected to build and maintain a holding of Debenhams shares equal to one times base salary. Executives are expected 
to retain 50% of any post-tax shares that vest under any share incentive plans until this shareholding is reached. The Committee 
expects executives to have met the shareholding guideline policy by the fifth anniversary of their appointment.

The following shows details of the executive directors’ shareholding compared to their requirement:

Number of shares

6,360,067*

Chief 
Executive

CFO

Value (based on 3 month average 
share price at year end 100.8246p)

Shareholding 
as % of salary

Shareholding 
requirement

£6,412,513

1,043%

34,900

£35,188

9%

100%

100%

Requirement met?

Yes

The CFO was appointed on 
10 January 2012 and has a period 
of five years to meet this guideline

* Includes 155,488 vested PSP shares that were exercised in November 2012 which the Chief Executive paid the tax on without sale of any of the shares. 

Outside appointments for executive directors
Executive directors may undertake external directorships with the consent of the board. Any proposed external directorships are 
considered by the Nomination Committee to ensure they do not cause a conflict of interest. Neither of the current executive directors 
hold any such directorships.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201379

TSR performance graph 
The performance graph below shows the Company’s total shareholder return against the FTSE 350 General Retailers Index over the 
period from 30 August 2008 to 31 August 2013. The General Retailers Index has been chosen as Debenhams has been a member 
throughout the period and it is made up of a broad spectrum of retail competitors (including major general retail listed comparators) 
in the principal product areas in which the Company trades.

300

250

200

150

100

50

0

30 Aug 2008

29 Aug 2009

28 Aug 2008

3 Sep 2011

1 Sep 2012

31 Aug 2013

Debenhams

FTSE 350 General Retailers

Source: DataStream

Historical Chief Executive pay 
The table below sets out details of the Chief Executive’s pay for the current year and the previous four years and the payout 
of incentive awards as a proportion of the maximum opportunity for each period. The Chief Executive’s pay is calculated as per 
the single figure of remuneration shown on page 75.

2009*

2010*

2011*

2012

2013

Single figure of total remuneration

£1,245,642

£ 1,477,607

£1,044,515

£1,288,857

£754,396

Annual variable element award rates 
against maximum opportunity

Long term incentive vesting rates 
against maximum opportunity

63.6%

100%

33.3%

40%

PSP: 0%

N/A

N/A

PSP: 32% 
ESOP: 100%

0%

N/A

*  The Chief Executive position for the period 2009-2011 was held by Rob Templeman. The Chief Executive position for 2012 and 2013 was held by the current incumbent 

Michael Sharp who previously held the role of Deputy Chief Executive. 

Details of the Remuneration Committee and advisors to the Committee

Committee members 
The Committee Chairman, Dennis Millard, is joined by Nigel Northridge, Stephen Ingham, Martina King, Mark Rolfe and Sophie 
Turner Laing to form the Remuneration Committee. Details of the members’ background and experience is provided within their 
biography on pages 56 to 57.

Director

Position

Number of meetings held and attended 
during the year (of those eligible to attend)

Dennis Millard Committee Chairman

Senior independent director

Stephen Ingham

Martina King

Nigel Northridge

Mark Rolfe

Sophie Turner Laing

Independent non-executive director

Independent non-executive director

Independent non-executive Chairman

Independent non-executive director

Independent non-executive director

4/4

1/1*

4/4

4/4

4/4

4/4

*  Stephen Ingham joined the Company and the Remuneration Committee on 8 January 2013 and therefore was only eligible to attend one meeting during the period. 

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 80

Remuneration policy continued

Role of the Committee
The full terms of reference for the Committee, which are 
reviewed annually, are available on the Company’s website 
at www.debenhamsplc.com. In summary, the Committee has 
responsibility for determining all elements of the remuneration 
of the executive directors and the Company Secretary together 
with the provisions of their service agreements, reviewing the 

bonus structure for the executive committee, reviewing the 
appropriateness and relevance of the Company’s remuneration 
policy (taking into account the remuneration arrangements and 
levels across the Company) and administering all aspects of  
any share incentives in operation for senior management. The 
remuneration of the non-executive directors is a matter for the 
Company Chairman and the executive members of the board.

During the year the Committee considered the following:

Meeting

Items considered

September 2012

•  Review of performance under bonus scheme for the financial year 2012

•  Approval of bonus structure proposals for the executive directors and Company schemes for financial year 2013

•  Discussion of 2013 Performance Share Plan awards for the Chief Executive, Chief Financial Officer and 

senior executives

•  Salary benchmarking and proposals for executive directors

18 October 2012

•  Approval of bonus payments for executive directors for the financial year 2012

•  Approval of award under the Performance Share Plan for the Chief Executive and Chief Financial Officer

•  Review of share plan maturity in 2012

•  Approval of bonus scheme for the financial year 2013

•  Approval of the remuneration report

•  Review of remuneration consultants’ voluntary code of conduct (Deloitte)

•  Treatment of leavers under the PSP

22 October 2012

•  Approval of vesting of share based awards in 2012

April 2013

•  Review of Company pension contribution for the Chief Executive

•  Update on the new directors’ remuneration report regulations

•  Preliminary discussions for arrangements in the financial year 2014

•  Appraisal of the performance of the remuneration consultants

September 2013

•  Review of performance under bonus schemes for the financial year 2013

•  Review of share plan maturity in 2013

•  Bonus structure proposals for the executive directors and Company schemes for financial year 2014

•  Discussion of 2014 Performance Share Plan awards for the executive directors and senior executives

•  Review of the draft 2013 directors’ remuneration report

October 2013

•  Review of performance against bonus targets for executive directors for the financial year 2013

•  Approval of the 2013 directors’ remuneration report

The September and October 2013 meetings took place after the year end but prior to the publication of the report and accounts.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201381

Advisors to the Committee
In performing its duties, the Committee has received advice 
from Deloitte LLP (Deloitte) who acted as external advisors to the 
Committee throughout the financial year, providing independent 
advice on directors’ remuneration and share incentives. The fees 
for advice provided to the Committee during the financial year 
were £18,500. 

Deloitte is one of the founding members of the Remuneration 
Consulting Group (“RCG“) and complies with the voluntary code 
of conduct in respect of the provision of remuneration consulting 
services. Deloitte provides industry and comparative employee 
remuneration data to Debenhams’ management. Deloitte also 
provided unrelated advisory services in respect of corporate  
and employment taxes during the year. 

Deloitte was appointed by the Committee. It is the view of  
the Committee that the Deloitte LLP engagement partner  
and team that provide remuneration advice to the Committee  
do not have connections with Debenhams that may impair  
their independence. The Committee reviewed the potential  
for conflicts of interest and judged that there were appropriate 
safeguards against such conflicts.

During the year the Committee undertook an evaluation of the 
remuneration committee advisors and concluded that the advice 
received is independent and straightforward and that the 
Committee has confidence in its advisors.

The Chief Executive, CFO and HR Director have attended certain 
Committee meetings and provided advice to the Committee 
during the year. They are not in attendance when matters relating 
to their own compensation or contracts are discussed. 

Summary of shareholder voting 
Debenhams remains committed to ongoing shareholder 
dialogue and takes an active interest in voting outcomes.  
In the event of a substantial vote against a resolution in relation  
to directors’ remuneration, Debenhams would seek to understand 
the reasons for any such vote and would set out in the following 
Annual Report and Accounts any actions in response to it. 

The following table sets out actual voting in respect of our 
previous report: 

2012 directors remuneration report 
(January 2013 Annual General Meeting)

For 

Against

99.36%

0.64%

18,594,763 votes were withheld in relation to this resolution  
(c.1.5% of share capital).

Audited information
Directors’ emoluments
The remuneration of each director who served during the year is set out in the table below:

Director

Nigel Northridge

Michael Sharp

Simon Herrick

Martina King

Dennis Millard

Mark Rolfe

Sophie Turner Laing

Peter Fitzgerald*

Stephen Ingham**

Total

Notes:

Salary/fees 
(£)

175,000

615,000

410,000

55,000

65,000

54,971

47,500

38,494

27,734

Benefits 
(£)

–

36,896

18,375

–

–

–

–

–

–

1,488,699

55,271

Bonus 
(£)

Annual allowance in 
lieu of pension 
(£)

Total 2013 
(£)

Total 2012 
(£)

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

102,500

61,500

–

–

–

–

–

–

175,000

754,396

489,875

55,000

65,000

54,971

47,500

38,494

27,734

175,000

969,361

532,782

55,000

65,000

47,500

47,500

–

–

164,000

1,707,970

1,892,143

*  Mr Fitzgerald joined the Company on 4 October 2012.

** Mr Ingham joined the Company on 8 January 2013.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportFinancial statementsStrategic report 82

Remuneration policy continued

Pensions
Michael Sharp is a deferred member of the Debenhams Executive Pension Plan. He ceased to accrue benefits in that plan  
on 31 March 2006. The table below shows his pension accrued at the year end.

Increase in 
accrued pension 
during the year
(£)

Increase in 
accrued pension 
during the year 
(net of inflation)
(£)

Accumulated total 
accrued pension 
at 31 August 2013
(£)

Transfer value as at 
1 September 2012 
of accrued pension as 
at 1 September 2012
(£)

Transfer value as at 
31 August 2013 
of accrued pension 
as at 31 August 2013
(£)

Increase in 
transfer value 
during the period
(£)

Michael Sharp

5,343

152

205,016

5,172,559

5,656,919

484,360

Directors’ interest in the Performance Share Plan

Director  Date of award

Number of 
shares held at 
1 September 
2012

Shares 
awarded 
during the 
year

Shares 
lapsed 
during the 
year

Shares 
exercised 
during the 
year

Number of 
shares held at 
31 August 
2013

Market 
value on 
date of 
award

Earliest date  
of vesting

Expiry date  
of options

Michael 
Sharp

24 November 2009

485,902

1 November 2011

1,396,973

0

0

1 November 2012

0

994,341

Simon 
Herrick

1 November 2011

620,877

0

1 November 2012

0

331,447

330,414

155,488*

0

83.35p 24 November 
2012

–

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1,396,973

64.43p

994,341

123.7p

620,877

64.43p

331,447

123.7p

1 November 
2014

1 November 
2015

1 November 
2014

1 November 
2015

1 May 2015

1 May 2016

1 May 2015

1 May 2016

* In respect of the performance share award granted on 24 November 2009, Mr Sharp exercised 155,488 shares on 18 April 2013 with a market value per share of 84.4p.

Directors’ interest in the Executive Share Option Plan

Date of award

Michael 
Sharp

Approved scheme 
24 November 2009

Unapproved scheme 
24 November 2009

Number of 
shares held at 
1 September 
2012

Shares 
granted 
during the 
year

Shares 
lapsed 
during the 
year

Shares 
vested 
during the 
year

Number of 
shares held at 
31 August 
2013

Option 
price

Earliest date  
of exercise

Expiry date  
of options

35,108

438,853

0

0

0

0

35,108 85.45p

438,853 85.45p

35,108 24 November 
2012

24 November 
2019

438,853 24 November 
2012

24 November 
2019

The closing mid-market price of the Company’s shares on 30 August 2013 was 107.1p and ranged from 78.8p to 123.7p during  
the period from 2 September 2012 to 31 August 2013.

On behalf of the board

Dennis Millard 
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
24 October 2013

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201383

Statement of directors’ responsibilities

The directors are responsible for preparing the annual report, the directors’ remuneration report and the financial statements  
in accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under the law, the directors 
have elected to prepare the Group Financial Statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRSs”)  
as adopted by the European Union and the Parent Company financial statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards and applicable law). Under company law, the directors  
must not approve financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the  
Group and the Company and of the profit or loss of the Group for that period. In preparing these financial statements,  
the directors are required to:

•  Select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently

•  Make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent

•  State whether IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and applicable UK Accounting Standards have been followed,  

subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the Group and Parent Company financial statements respectively

•  Prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Company 

will continue in business

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company and the Group and enable 
them to ensure that the financial statements and the directors’ remuneration report comply with the Companies Act 2006 and, as 
regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS regulation. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the 
Company and the Group and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The directors are responsible for maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing 
the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Directors’ responsibility statement pursuant to disclosure and transparency rule 4.1.12
Each of the directors, whose names and functions are detailed on pages 56 and 57, confirms that to the best of his/her knowledge:

•  The Group financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU, give a true and fair view 

of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Group

•  The directors’ report contained in this report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and  
the position of the Company and the Group, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that it faces

On behalf of the board

Michael Sharp   
Chief Executive  

24 October 2013

Simon Herrick
Chief Financial Officer

i

F
n
a
n
c

i

a

l

s
t
a
t
e
m
e
n
t
s

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Directors’ reportCorporate governance reportDirectors’ remuneration reportStrategic report  
 
 
 
84

Independent auditors’ report to the members 
of Debenhams plc (Group)

We have audited the Group financial statements of Debenhams plc for the year ended 31 August 2013 which comprise the 
consolidated income statement, the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated balance sheet, the 
consolidated statement of changes in equity, the consolidated cash flow statement and the related notes. The financial reporting 
framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as 
adopted by the European Union. 

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors 
As explained more fully in the statement of directors’ responsibilities set out on page 83, the directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the Group financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit 
and express an opinion on the Group financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing 
(UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors. 

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the Company’s members as a body in accordance with 
Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume 
responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save  
where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements 
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable 
assurance that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an 
assessment of: whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the Group’s circumstances and have been consistently applied  
and adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation 
of the financial statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the Annual Report and Accounts to 
identify material inconsistencies with the audited financial statements. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements  
or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.

Opinion on financial statements 
In our opinion the Group financial statements: 
•  give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s affairs as at 31 August 2013 and of its profit and cash flows for the year then ended; 

•  have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union; and 

•  have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the lAS Regulation. 

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion:
•  the information given in the directors’ report for the financial year for which the Group financial statements are prepared is 

consistent with the Group financial statements; and

•  the information given in the risk review set out on pages 42 to 51 with respect to internal control and risk management systems and 
the information given in the directors report on page 53 about share capital structures is consistent with the financial statements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following: 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•  certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or

•  a corporate governance statement has not been prepared by the parent company.

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review: 
•  the directors’ statement, set out on page 54, in relation to going concern; 

•  the part of the corporate governance statement relating to the Company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the UK Corporate 

Governance Code specified for our review; and

•  certain elements of the report to shareholders by the board on directors’ remuneration.

Other matter 
We have reported separately on the parent company financial statements of Debenhams plc for the year ended 31 August 2013 and 
on the information in the directors’ remuneration report that is described as having been audited.

Martin Hodgson 
(Senior Statutory Auditor)

for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
London

24 October 2013

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 201385 

Consolidated Income Statement 
For the financial year ended 31 August 2013 

Revenue  
Cost of sales  
Gross profit  
Distribution costs  
Administrative expenses  
Operating profit  
Finance income 
Finance costs 
Profit before taxation  
Taxation 
Profit for the financial year attributable to owners of the parent

Earnings per share attributable to owners of the parent (expressed in pence per share) 

Basic 
Diluted  

52 weeks 
ended 
31 August 
2013 
£m 
2,282.2 
(1,972.1)
310.1 
(97.4)
(44.7)
168.0 
1.5 
(15.5)
154.0 
(26.1)
127.9 

52 weeks
ended 
1 September 
2012
£m
2,229.8
(1,927.5)
302.3
(81.0)
(46.3)
175.0
1.2
(17.9)
158.3
(33.0)
125.3

Pence 
per share 
10.2 
10.2 

Pence 
per share
9.8
9.8

Note 
3, 4  

6  
8  
9  

10  

12  
12  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
86 

Consolidated Statement 
of Comprehensive Income 
For the financial year ended 31 August 2013 

Profit for the financial year 
Other comprehensive income/(expense) 

Items that will not be reclassified to profit and loss
Actuarial gains/(losses) recognised in the pension schemes
Deferred tax (charge)/credit on actuarial losses or gains
Current tax credit on the pension schemes 

Items that may be reclassified to profit and loss 
Currency translation differences 
Change in the valuation of the available-for-sale investments
Gains on cash flow hedges 
Gains on cash flow hedges – tax charge 
Transferred to the income statement on cash flow hedges
Transferred to the income statement on cash flow hedges – tax charge
Recycled and adjusted against cost of sales 
Recycled and adjusted against cost of sales – tax charge

52 weeks 
 ended 
31 August 
2013 
£m 
127.9 

52 weeks
 ended 
1 September 
2012
£m
125.3

Note 

23 
24 

15 

9 

15.6 
(6.3)
2.5 

3.6 
(0.8)
11.9 
(2.7)
3.3 
(0.8)
(7.6)
1.7 

(82.3)
16.9
2.3

(6.7)
(0.7)
5.0
(1.6)
2.0
(0.4)
(1.9)
0.5

Total other comprehensive income/(expense) 
Total comprehensive income for the year 

20.4 
148.3 

(66.9)
58.4

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
87 

Consolidated Balance Sheet 
As at 31 August 2013 

Assets 
Non-current assets 
Intangible assets 
Property, plant and equipment 
Available-for-sale investments  
Derivative financial instruments 
Trade and other receivables 
Retirement benefit surplus 
Deferred tax assets 

Current assets 
Inventories  
Trade and other receivables 
Derivative financial instruments 
Cash and cash equivalents  

Liabilities 
Current liabilities 
Bank overdraft and borrowings 
Derivative financial instruments 
Trade and other payables 
Current tax liabilities 
Provisions  

Net current liabilities  
Non-current liabilities 
Bank overdraft and borrowings 
Derivative financial instruments 
Deferred tax liabilities 
Other non-current liabilities 
Provisions  
Retirement benefit obligations 

Net assets 
Shareholders’ equity 
Share capital 
Share premium account 
Merger reserve 
Reverse acquisition reserve 
Hedging reserve 
Other reserves 
Retained earnings 
Total equity 

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

Note  

13  
14  
15  
22  
17  
23 
24  

16  
17  
22  
18  

20  
22  
19  

26  

20  
22  
24  
25  
26  
23 

27  

876.5 
692.1 
1.1 
1.9 
16.8 
4.6 
69.3 
1,662.3 

357.9 
78.3 
7.3 
27.0 
470.5 

(163.1)
(2.1)
(545.8)
(25.3)
(5.6)
(741.9)
(271.4)

(235.9)
(3.7)
(59.1)
(322.1)
(1.1)
(24.6)
(646.5)
744.4 

0.1 
682.9 
1,200.9 
(1,199.9)
3.2 
(7.7)
64.9 
744.4 

864.9
661.6
1.9
0.8
19.3
–
83.2
1,631.7

332.3
75.4
7.8
44.0
459.5

(163.4)
(1.9)
(525.4)
(31.0)
(5.3)
(727.0)
(267.5)

(249.3)
(8.9)
(64.7)
(321.9)
(1.1)
(57.3)
(703.2)
661.0

0.1
682.9
1,200.9
(1,199.9)
(2.6)
(10.5)
(9.9)
661.0

The financial statements on pages 85 to 126 were approved by the board on 24 October 2013 and were signed on its behalf by: 

Simon Herrick 
Chief Financial Officer 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
88 

Consolidated Statement of 
Changes in Equity 
As at 31 August 2013 

  Note 

Balance at 3 September 2011 
Profit for the financial year 
Actuarial loss on pension schemes
Deferred tax credit on pension schemes 
Current tax credit on pension schemes 
Change in the value of available-for-sale 
investments 
Currency translation differences 
Gains on cash flow hedges (net of tax) 
Reclassification adjustments 
–  transferred to the income statement on 

cash flow hedges (net of tax) 

–  recycled and adjusted against the cost  

of inventory (net of tax) 

Total comprehensive income and expense 
for the financial year 
Share-based payment charge 
Purchase of treasury shares 
Dividends paid 
Total transactions with owners 
Balance at 1 September 2012 
Profit for the financial year 
Actuarial gain on pension schemes
Deferred tax charge on pension schemes 
Current tax credit on pension schemes 
Change in the value of available-for-sale 
investments 
Currency translation differences 
Gains on cash flow hedges (net of tax) 
Reclassifications adjustments 
–  transferred to the income statement on 

cash flow hedges (net of tax) 

–  recycled and adjusted against the cost  

of inventory (net of tax) 

Total comprehensive income and 
expense for the financial year 
Share-based payment charge 
Share option receipts 
Purchase of treasury shares 
Dividends paid 
Total transactions with owners 
Balance at 31 August 2013 

23 
24 

15 

28 
27 
11 

23 
24 

15 

28 

27 
11 

Share capital 
and share 
premium 
account 
£m
683.0
–
–
–
–

Merger 
reserve 
£m
1,200.9
–
–
–
–

Reverse 
acquisition 
reserve 
£m
(1,199.9)
–
–
–
–

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–
–
683.0
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
1,200.9
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
(1,199.9)
–
–
–
–

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–

–

–

–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
–
–
683.0 1,200.9 (1,199.9)

–
–
–
–
–
–

Hedging 
reserve  

£m
(6.2) 
–
–
–
–

–
–
3.4

1.6

(1.4) 

3.6
–
–
–
–
(2.6) 
–
–
–
–

–
–
9.2

2.5

(5.9) 

5.8
–
–
–
–
–
3.2 

Other 
 reserve  
£m 
(3.1) 
– 
– 
– 
– 

Retained 
earnings
£m
(15.1)
125.3
(82.3)
16.9
2.3

(0.7) 
(6.7) 
– 

– 

– 

(7.4) 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(10.5) 
– 
– 
– 
– 

(0.8) 
3.6 
– 

– 

– 

2.8 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
(7.7) 

–
–
–

–

–

62.2
1.6
(20.1)
(38.5)
(57.0)
(9.9)
127.9
15.6
(6.3)
2.5

–
–
–

–

–

139.7
1.5
0.1
(25.1)
(41.4)
(64.9)
64.9

Total 
equity
£m
659.6
125.3
(82.3)
16.9
2.3

(0.7)
(6.7)
3.4

1.6

(1.4)

58.4
1.6
(20.1)
(38.5)
(57.0)
661.0
127.9
15.6
(6.3)
2.5

(0.8)
3.6
9.2

2.5

(5.9)

148.3
1.5
0.1
(25.1)
(41.4)
(64.9)
744.4

For a description of the nature and purpose of each reserve, together with an analysis of other reserves, see note 27. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
89 

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement 
For the financial year ended 31 August 2013 

Cash flows from operating activities 
Cash generated from operations 
Finance income 
Finance costs  
Tax paid 
Net cash generated from operating activities 
Cash flows from investing activities 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment 
Purchase of intangible assets 
Net cash used in investing activities  
Cash flows from financing activities 
Repurchase of term loan facility  
Drawdown/(repayment) of facility 
Purchase of treasury shares  
Dividends paid  
Share option receipts 
Finance lease payments 
Debt issue costs  
Net cash used in financing activities 
Net (decrease)/increase in cash and cash equivalents 
Net cash and cash equivalents at beginning of financial year
Foreign exchange losses on cash and cash equivalents
Net cash and cash equivalents at end of financial year 

52 weeks 
 ended 
31 August 
2013 
£m 

52 weeks
 ended 
1 September 
2012
£m

241.1 
0.4 
(12.9)
(29.3)
199.3 

(113.7)
(19.6)
(133.3)

(13.3)
6.0 
(25.1)
(41.4)
0.1 
(2.3)
(0.5)
(76.5)
(10.5)
34.6 
– 
24.1 

259.7
0.2
(13.8)
(44.6)
201.5

(101.4)
(17.2)
(118.6)

–
(10.0)
(20.1)
(38.5)
–
(2.2)
–
(70.8)
12.1
22.8
(0.3)
34.6

Note  

30  

20  

11  

20  

31  

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
90 

Notes to the financial statements 
For the financial year ended 31 August 2013 

1 General information 

Introduction 
Debenhams plc (“the Company”) is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in the United Kingdom under the 
Companies Act 2006 (Company No. 5448421). The address of the registered office is 10 Brock Street, Regent’s Place, London 
NW1 3FG. 

The principal activity of the Company is that of a holding company. The principal activities of the Group and its subsidiaries 
(together the “Group” or the “Debenhams Group”) is the sale of fashion clothing and accessories, cosmetics and products  
for use in the home. The Group trades from department stores in the UK, the Republic of Ireland and Denmark, on the internet 
and has international franchise stores. 

The Group prepares its financial statements for the financial year ending on the nearest Saturday to 31 August of a given 
calendar year. 

The principal companies within the Group during the financial year ended 31 August 2013 are disclosed in note 33. 

2 Accounting policies 
The Group’s principal accounting policies, as described below, have been consistently applied to all financial years presented,  
unless otherwise stated. 

Basis of preparation 
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis and in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”) including International Accounting Standards (“IAS”) and International Financial 
Reporting Interpretations Committee (“IFRIC”) interpretations and with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable  
to companies reporting under accounting standards as adopted for use in the EU. The consolidated financial statements for  
the financial years ended 31 August 2013 and 1 September 2012 have been prepared under the historical cost convention as 
modified by the revaluation of available-for-sale financial assets and financial assets and financial liabilities (including derivative 
instruments) at fair value through profit or loss. 

The preparation of the financial statements, in conformity with IFRS, requires the use of estimates and assumptions that affect 
the reporting amounts of assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amount of revenue and 
expenses during the reporting period. Although these results are based on management’s best knowledge of the amounts, 
events or actions, actual results ultimately may differ from those estimates (see note 5). 

Consolidation 
The financial statements comprise a consolidation of the accounts of Debenhams plc and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries 
include all entities over which the Group has the power to govern the financial and operating policies. The existence and effect 
of potential voting rights that are currently exercisable or convertible are considered when assessing whether the Group 
controls another entity. Subsidiaries are fully consolidated from the date on which the Group has the power to control.  
They are de-consolidated from the date that control ceases. 

On consolidation, inter company transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Group companies  
are eliminated. Unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the transaction provides evidence of an impairment of the asset 
transferred. Accounting policies of the Company and its subsidiaries have been changed where these have a significant impact 
on the Group’s income statement or balance sheet to ensure consistency with the policies adopted by the Group. 

Revenue recognition 
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable and represents amounts receivable for goods 
and services provided in the normal course of business, net of staff discounts and the cost of loyalty scheme points, and is 
stated net of value added tax and other sales-related taxes. 

Revenue on department store sales of goods and commission on concession and consignment sales is recognised when goods 
are sold to the customer. Retail sales are usually in cash or by credit or debit card. Internet sales are recognised when the goods 
are despatched to the customer. Revenue from gift cards and gift vouchers sold by the Group is recognised on the redemption 
of the gift card or gift voucher. Revenue from sales to franchisees is recognised when the goods are despatched. 

It is the Group’s policy to sell its products to the end customer with a right of return. Accumulated experience is used to 
estimate and provide for such returns at the time of sale. 

Segmental reporting 
IFRS 8 “Operating Segments” requires segment information to be presented based on what is reported to the Chief Operating 
Decision Maker. The Group has identified the executive committee as its Chief Operating Decision Maker and has identified 
two operating segments, UK and international. 

Interest recognition 
Finance income and finance costs are recognised in the period to which they relate using the effective interest rate method.  

 
 
91 

Dividend distribution 
A final dividend distribution to the Company’s shareholders is recognised as a liability in the Company’s and Group’s financial 
statements in the period in which the dividend is approved by the Company’s shareholders. Interim dividends are recognised  
when paid. 

Retirement benefit costs 
The Group operates various defined benefit and defined contribution or money purchase schemes for its employees.  

A defined benefit scheme is a pension plan that defines an amount of pension benefit that an employee will receive on 
retirement. The Group accounts for pensions and other post-employment benefits under IAS 19 “Employee Benefits”.  
The pension scheme surplus or deficit recognised in the balance sheet represents the difference between the fair value  
of the plan assets and the present value of the defined benefit obligation at the balance sheet date. This surplus or deficit  
is actuarially calculated on an annual basis using the projected unit credit method. The income statement charge/(credit)  
is the net of interest cost on pension scheme liabilities and expected return on plan assets. Actuarial gains and losses are 
recognised immediately in the statement of comprehensive income. 

A defined contribution scheme is a pension plan under which the Group pays fixed contributions to a separate entity. Payments 
to defined contribution pension schemes are charged as an expense as they fall due. Any contributions unpaid at the balance 
sheet date are included as an accrual as at that date. The Group has no further payment obligations once the contributions 
have been paid. 

Share-based payments 
The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to certain employees. A fair value for the equity-settled share awards  
is measured at the date of grant. The Group measures the fair value of each award using the Black-Scholes model where 
appropriate. 

The fair value determined at the grant date is expensed on a straight line basis over the vesting period, based on the  
Group’s estimate of the shares that will eventually vest and adjusted for the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions.  
At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. Non-market 
performance and service conditions are included in assumptions about the number of options that are expected to vest.  
It recognises the impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment 
to equity. 

When the options are exercised, the Company may issue new shares, utilise shares held as treasury shares or those held within 
the Debenhams Retail Employee Trust. The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited  
to share capital (at nominal value) and share premium when the options are exercised. 

Foreign exchange 
a) Functional and presentation currency 
Items included in the financial statements of each of the Group’s entities are measured using the currency of the primary 
economic environment in which the entity operates (“the functional currency”). The consolidated financial statements are 
presented in sterling, which is the Group’s presentation currency. 
b) Group companies 
The results and financial position of all Group entities that have a functional currency different from the presentation currency 
are translated into the presentation currency as follows: 

Assets and liabilities are translated at the closing rate at the date of the balance sheet. 

Income and expenses are translated at the average exchange rate unless this average is not a reasonable approximation of the 
cumulative effect of the rates prevailing on the transaction dates, in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates 
of the transaction. 

Resulting exchange differences are recognised in other comprehensive income and accumulated as a separate component  
of equity. 

Gains or losses on intra group loans regarded as permanent are transferred to other comprehensive income and offset gains  
or losses on translation of the net investments that are recorded in equity. 

 
 
 
92 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

2 Accounting policies continued 

Foreign exchange continued 
c) Transactions and balances 
Transactions denominated in foreign currencies are translated into the respective functional currency at the exchange rates 
prevailing at the dates of the transactions.  

Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation at the balance 
sheet date exchange rate, of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies, are recognised in the income 
statement, except when deferred in other comprehensive income as qualifying cash flow hedges. 

Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the closing rates ruling at the 
balance sheet date. 

Translation differences on non-monetary financial assets such as equities classified as available-for-sale are included in other 
comprehensive income and accumulated as a separate component of equity. 

Foreign exchange gains and losses that relate to borrowings, cash and cash equivalents and the translation of inter company 
loans are presented in the income statement within finance income or costs with the exception of permanent intra group loans 
which are reclassified to other comprehensive income. All other foreign exchange gains and losses are presented in the income 
statement within cost of sales. 

Taxation 
Taxation expense represents the sum of current tax and deferred tax. Tax which relates to items recognised in other 
comprehensive income or equity is recognised in other comprehensive income or equity respectively. 

Current tax is based on taxable profits for the financial period using tax rates that are in force during the period. Taxable profit 
differs from net profit as reported in the income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable  
or deductible in other financial years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. 

Deferred tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and 
liabilities and their carrying amounts for financial reporting purposes. If deferred tax arises from initial recognition of an asset  
or liability in a transaction other than a business combination that at the time of the transaction affects neither accounting nor 
taxable profit or loss, it is not accounted for. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates that have been enacted or substantially 
enacted at the balance sheet date and are expected to apply when the related deferred income tax asset is realised or the 
deferred tax liability is settled. 

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profit will be available against which  
the temporary differences can be utilised. 

Deferred tax is provided on temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries, except where the timing of the 
reversals of the temporary differences is controlled by the Group and it is probable that the temporary differences will not 
reverse in the foreseeable future. 

Leased assets 
a) Finance leases 
Leases of assets which transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership to the Group are classified as finance  
leases. Finance leases are classified as a financial liability and measured at amortised cost. Finance leases are capitalised  
at the inception of the lease at the lower of the fair value of the asset or the present value of the minimum lease payments  
and depreciated over the shorter of the useful economic life or the period of the lease. The resulting lease obligations are 
included in liabilities. 

Lease payments are apportioned between finance costs and reduction of the lease obligation so as to achieve a constant rate 
of interest on the remaining balance of the liability. 

b) Operating leases 
All other leases are classified as operating leases. Rentals payable under operating leases, net of lease incentives, are charged 
to the income statement on a straight line basis over the period of the lease. 

Where property lease contracts contain guaranteed fixed minimum incremental rental payments, the total committed cost  
is determined and is calculated and amortised on a straight line basis over the life of the lease. 

 
 
93 

Business combinations 
The purchase method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries by the Group. 

The cost of an acquisition is measured as the fair value of the consideration given, liabilities incurred or assumed and equity 
instruments issued by the Group in exchange for control of the acquiree. All costs directly attributable to an acquisition are 
expensed to the income statement. 

Identifiable assets and liabilities acquired in a subsidiary are initially measured at their fair values at the acquisition date, 
provided they meet the conditions set out in IFRS 3 (Revised) “Business Combinations”. The excess of cost over the Group’s 
share of identifiable net assets acquired is recognised as goodwill. If, after reassessment, the cost of acquisition is less than  
the fair value of assets acquired, the excess is immediately recognised in the income statement. 

Intangible assets 
a) Goodwill 
Goodwill on acquisition of subsidiaries represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the Group’s 
share of the net identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities of the acquired subsidiary. Goodwill on acquisition  
of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets. Goodwill is not amortised but tested for impairment annually, or when trigger 
events occur, and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. 

Goodwill represents the goodwill for a portfolio of sites, which have been allocated to groups of cash-generating units on  
a regional basis for the purpose of impairment testing. 

b) Other intangible assets 
Other intangible assets are held at cost less accumulated amortisation and any provision for impairment. 

Internally generated software costs, where it is clear that the software developed is technically feasible and will be completed 
and that the software generated will generate economic benefit, are capitalised as an intangible asset. Included within 
intangible assets are assets in the course of construction. These assets comprise primarily web development projects including 
directly attributable costs to bring the assets into use and may include capitalised borrowing costs. Amortisation is provided  
at the following rates per annum to write off the costs of other intangible assets, less residual value, on a straight line basis  
from the date on which they are brought into use: 

Acquired licences and trademarks
Internally generated software 
Purchased software  

Up to 10%
12.5% to 33.3%
12.5% to 33.3%

Impairment testing 
Assets that have an indefinite useful life are not subject to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment. Assets that  
are subject to amortisation are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying 
value may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds 
its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For  
the purposes of assessing impairment, assets are grouped by store, which is the lowest level for which there are separately 
identifiable cash flows (cash-generating units). Non-financial assets other than goodwill that have been impaired are reviewed  
at each reporting date for possible reversal of the impairment. 

 
 
 
94 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

2 Accounting policies continued 

Property, plant and equipment 
Property, plant and equipment are held at historic purchase cost less accumulated depreciation and any provision for 
impairment. Cost includes the original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working 
condition for its intended use. This may include capitalised borrowing costs. 

Depreciation is provided at the following rates per annum to write off the cost of property, plant and equipment, less residual 
value, on a straight line basis from the date on which they are brought into use: 

Freehold land  
Freehold buildings 
Long leasehold land and buildings including landlords’ fixtures and fittings 
Short leasehold land and buildings including landlords’ fixtures and fittings 
Retail fixtures and fittings  
Office equipment 
Computer equipment 
Vehicles 

Not depreciated 
1%
1% or life of lease if shorter 
Life of lease 
4% to 25%
10% to 12.5%
10% to 33.3%
25% or life of lease 

Gains and losses on disposal are determined by comparing proceeds with carrying amount. These are included in the income 
statement.  

Included within property, plant and equipment are assets in the course of construction. These assets comprise stores  
which are under construction or modernisation, including costs directly attributable to bring the asset into use. Transfers  
to the appropriate category of property, plant and equipment are made when the store opens. No depreciation is provided  
on stores or other assets under construction. 

Impairment testing 
Assets that have an indefinite useful life are not subject to depreciation and are tested annually for impairment. Assets that are 
subject to depreciation are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying 
value may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds 
its recoverable amount. 

The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s fair value less costs to sell and value in use. For the purposes of assessing 
impairment, assets are grouped by store, which is the lowest level for which there are separately identifiable cash flows  
(cash-generating units). Non-financial assets other than goodwill that have been impaired are reviewed at each reporting  
date for possible reversal of the impairment. 

Capitalisation of finance costs 
Finance costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of qualifying assets are capitalised to the cost  
of the asset, gross of tax relief. Qualifying assets are those that necessarily take a substantial period of time to prepare for  
their intended use. 

Available-for-sale investments 
Purchases and sales of financial assets are recognised on the trade-date, being the date on which the Group commits to 
purchase or sell the asset. The Group classifies its investments as available-for-sale financial assets in accordance with IAS 39 
“Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement”. Available-for-sale financial investments are non-derivative assets that 
are either designated in this category or are not classified in the other financial instrument categories being “Fair value through 
the profit or loss” or “Loans and receivables”. They are included in non-current assets unless management intends to dispose 
of the investment within 12 months of the balance sheet date. Investments are initially recognised at fair value plus any 
transaction costs and subsequently at fair value. 

The fair values of quoted investments are based on current bid prices. If the market for a financial asset is not active (and for 
unlisted securities), the Group establishes fair value by using valuation techniques. These include the use of recent arm’s length 
transactions, reference to other instruments that are substantially the same, discounted cash flow analysis and option pricing 
models, making maximum use of market inputs and relying as little as possible on entity-specific inputs. The fair value  
of available-for-sale investments denominated in a foreign currency is calculated in that foreign currency and translated  
at the spot rate at the reporting date. Changes in the fair value of securities classified as “available for sale” are recognised  
in other comprehensive income. 

An impairment test is performed annually on the carrying value of each investment. An impairment loss is recognised  
for the amount by which the asset’s carrying value exceeds its recoverable amount. Impairment losses are recognised  
in the income statement. 

 
95 

Inventories 
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value using the retail method and represent goods for resale. 
Cost includes all direct expenditure and other attributable costs incurred in bringing inventories to their present location and 
condition. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price in the ordinary course of business, less applicable variable selling 
expenses. This method intrinsically takes into account any stock loss or markdown to goods sold below cost. Concession 
inventories are not included within inventory held by the Group. 

Trade and other receivables 
Trade receivables are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently held at amortised cost less provisions for impairment. 
A provision for impairment of trade receivables is established when there is evidence that the Group will not be able to collect 
all amounts due according to the original terms of the receivables. The amount of the provision is the difference between the 
asset’s carrying amount and the present value of future cash flows discounted at the effective interest rate. The movement in 
the provision is recognised in the income statement. 

Cash and cash equivalents 
Cash and cash equivalents include cash in hand, deposits held at the bank and other short-term liquid investments with  
original maturities of approximately three months or less.  

Borrowings 
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at 
amortised cost. Any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised  
in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method. 

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability  
for at least 12 months after the balance sheet date. 

Borrowing costs 
Borrowing costs that are facility costs are recognised initially at fair value and are amortised over the term of the facilities using 
the effective interest rate on the committed amount of each facility. 

Debt repurchase 
The nominal value of debt repurchased has been accounted for as a loan redemption, reducing net borrowings at the balance 
sheet date. 

Trade payables 
Trade payables, defined as financial liabilities in accordance with IAS 39 (“Financial Instruments”), are recognised initially at fair 
value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

All of the trade payables are non-interest bearing. 

Other payables 
Included within other payables are lease incentives received from landlords either through developers’ contributions  
or rent-free periods. These incentives are being credited to the income statement on a straight line basis over the term  
of the relevant lease.  

Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events and where  
it is more likely than not an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably 
estimated. Provisions are measured at management’s best estimate of the expenditure required to settle the obligation  
at the balance sheet date. 

 
 
 
 
96 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

2 Accounting policies continued 

Share capital 
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. 

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares in equity are shown as a deduction, net of tax,  
from the proceeds. 

Where the Company purchases its own ordinary shares, the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental 
costs (net of income taxes), is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled 
or reissued. Where such ordinary shares are subsequently reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable 
incremental transaction costs together with the related income tax effects, are included in equity attributable to the Company’s 
equity holders. 

Derivatives 
Derivatives comprise interest rate swaps and forward foreign exchange contracts. Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value 
on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently re-measured at fair value. The method of recognising  
the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as an effective hedging instrument and the nature  
of the item being hedged. The Group designates certain derivatives as hedges of highly probable forecast transactions  
(cash flow hedges). 

At the inception of the transaction, the Group documents the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items  
as well as its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. The Group also documents  
its assessment, both at the inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions 
are highly effective in offsetting changes in cash flows of hedged items. 

i) Cash flow hedges 
The effective portion of the changes in fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is 
recognised in equity. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the relevant line  
of the income statement which will be affected by the underlying hedged item. Forward exchange contracts designated  
as cash flow hedges are de-designated and subsequently classified as “held for trading” when the underlying forecast 
transaction is recognised in the financial statements. 

Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified and adjusted against the initial measurement of the underlying hedged  
item when the underlying hedged item is recognised on the balance sheet or in the income statement. 

When a hedged instrument expires, is sold or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge 
accounting is discontinued. Any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time is held in equity until the forecast 
transaction occurs. When a forecasted transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was  
reported in equity is immediately reclassified to the relevant line of the income statement which would have been affected  
by the forecasted transaction. 

ii) Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting 
Certain derivatives do not qualify for hedge accounting. Changes in fair value of any derivative instruments that do not qualify 
for hedge accounting are recognised immediately in the income statement within finance costs. 

New standards and interpretations 
New or revised standards or interpretations which were mandatory for the first time in the financial year beginning 2 September 
2012 did not have a material impact on the net assets or results of the Group.  

IAS 1 (amended) “Financial Statement Presentation” regarding other comprehensive income is effective from periods that 
commenced on or after 1 July 2012. The amendments do not address which items are presented in “other comprehensive 
income” (“OCI”), but require entities to group items presented in OCI on the basis of whether they are or can be reclassified  
to the Group income statement subsequently (reclassification adjustments).  

Standards and interpretations in issue, but not yet effective, are not expected to have a material effect on the Group’s net 
assets or results, except for IAS 19 (revised). 

IAS 19 “Employee Benefits” has been revised and was endorsed by the EU in June 2012. It is effective from periods that 
commenced on or after 1 January 2013. The directors anticipate that the adoption of IAS 19 (revised) in the financial year that 
started 1 September 2013 would result in an increase in the pension charge of approximately £13.3 million in the year ending 
30 August 2014 with a corresponding increase in net actuarial gains on pension schemes before tax. 

 
 
97 

3 Segmental reporting 
IFRS 8 “Operating Segments” requires disclosure of the operating segments which are reported to the Chief Operating 
Decision Maker (“CODM”). The CODM has been identified as the executive committee, which includes the executive directors 
and other key management. It is the executive committee that has responsibility for planning and controlling the activities  
of the Group. 

The Group’s reportable segments have been identified as the UK and international. The segments are reported to the CODM 
to operating profit level, using the same accounting policies as applied to the Group accounts. The Group does not review  
the assets and liabilities by operating segment as these are reviewed on a Group-wide basis given their transposable nature.  
As a result, no such analysis has been provided. 

Segmental analysis of results 

Financial year ended 31 August 2013 
Gross transaction value  
Concessions, consignments and staff discounts 
External revenue 
Operating profit 
Other segment items 
–  Depreciation  
–  Amortisation  

Financial year ended 1 September 2012  
Gross transaction value  
Concessions, consignments and staff discounts 
External revenue 
Operating profit  
Other segment items 
–  Depreciation  
–  Amortisation  

UK  
£m 

International 
£m 

Total 
£m

2,254.8 
(358.9) 
1,895.9 
139.8 

522.0 
(135.7)
386.3 
28.2 

2,776.8
(494.6)
2,282.2
168.0

75.3 
8.7 

9.1 
1.5 

84.4
10.2

2,204.6 
(344.3) 
1,860.3 
144.3 

72.6 
7.7 

503.4 
(133.9)
369.5 
30.7 

9.8 
1.5 

2,708.0
(478.2)
2,229.8
175.0

82.4
9.2

Total segmental operating profit may be reconciled to total profit before taxation as follows: 

Total operating profit 
Finance income 
Finance costs 
Total profit before taxation 

Revenues analysed by country, based on the customers’ location, are set out below: 

United Kingdom  
Denmark 
Republic of Ireland 
Rest of the world 
Total external revenue 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
168.0 
1.5 
(15.5)
154.0 

1 September 
2012
£m
175.0
1.2
(17.9)
158.3

31 August 
2013 
£m 
1,895.9 
157.8 
134.3 
94.2 
2,282.2 

1 September 
2012
£m
1,860.3
142.7
136.5
90.3
2,229.8

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
98 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

3 Segmental reporting continued 

Segmental analysis of results continued 
Non-current assets, which comprise intangible assets, property, plant and equipment and other receivables analysed by 
country, are set out below: 

United Kingdom 
Denmark 
Republic of Ireland 
Rest of the world 
Total non-current assets 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
1,515.6 
38.7 
30.3 
0.8 
1,585.4 

1 September 
2012
£m
1,476.1
33.3
32.1
4.3
1,545.8

4 Gross transaction value 
Revenue from concession and consignment sales is required to be shown on a net basis, being the commission received rather 
than the gross value achieved on the sale. Management believes that gross transaction value, which presents revenue on a 
gross basis before adjusting for concessions, consignments and staff discounts, represents a good guide to the overall activity 
of the Group. 

Gross transaction value  

A reconciliation of gross transaction value to external revenue is included in note 3. 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
2,776.8 

1 September 
2012
£m
2,708.0

5 Critical accounting estimates and judgements 
The Group makes estimates and assumptions concerning the future. The resulting accounting estimates will, by definition, 
seldom equal the related actual results. Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are based on historical 
experience and other factors, including expectations of future events that are believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances. The estimates and assumptions that have a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying 
amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial period are discussed below. 

Estimated impairment of goodwill 
The Group tests whether goodwill has suffered any impairment in accordance with the accounting policy stated in note 2. 
The recoverable amount of cash-generating units is determined based on a value-in-use calculation. The method requires an 
estimate of future cash flows and the selection of a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the net present value of the 
cash flows. Actual outcomes could vary; see note 13 for further details. 

Estimated useful life of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets 
At the date of capitalising property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, the Group estimates the useful life of the asset 
based on management’s judgement and experience. Due to the significance of capital investment to the Group, variances 
between actual and estimated useful economic lives could impact results both positively and negatively. 

Inventories 
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value using the retail method and represent goods for resale. 
This method intrinsically takes into account any stock loss or markdown to goods sold below cost. Concession inventories  
are not included within inventory held by the Group. 

Retirement benefits 
The Group’s defined benefit schemes’ pension liability/asset, which is assessed each period by actuaries, are based on 
key assumptions including return on plan assets, discount rates, mortality rates, inflation, future salary and pension costs. 
These assumptions, individually or collectively, may be different to actual outcomes. 

Other key assumptions for pension obligations are based in part on current market conditions; additional information relating 
to this is disclosed in note 23. 

 
 
 
 
99 

Taxation and deferred taxation 
The Group is subject to income taxes in the UK, the Republic of Ireland, Denmark and Hong Kong. At each financial period end, 
judgement is required in determining the provision for income taxes. The Group recognises liabilities for anticipated tax issues 
based on the best estimates at the balance sheet date. 

Significant judgement is also required in determining the deferred tax on developers’ contributions, fair value losses and gains, 
retirement benefit assets and liabilities and other provisions. The Group recognises deferred tax assets and liabilities based  
on the best estimate at the balance sheet date. 

Where the final tax outcome of the above matters is different from the amounts that were initially recorded, such differences will 
impact the corporation tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which such determination is made. The final outcome of 
some of these tax items may give rise to material profit or loss and/or cash flow movements. 

Share-based payments 
The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to certain employees. The fair value determined at the grant date is 
expensed on a straight line basis over the vesting period. The fair value is calculated using the appropriate fair value model 
with the estimated level of vesting being reviewed annually by management. The key assumptions of this model are set out 
in note 28. 

6 Operating profit 

The following items have been included in arriving at operating profit:
The amounts of inventory written down during the financial year
Cost of inventory recognised as an expense  
Employment costs (note 7)  
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 14) 
Amortisation of intangible assets (note 13)  
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Operating lease rentals 
Foreign exchange gains 
Auditors’ remuneration  

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

12.0 
1,150.2 
362.6 
84.4 
10.2 
0.2 
206.9 
(7.9)
0.5 

13.0
1,131.2
360.0
82.4
9.2
0.2
203.6
(14.8)
0.4

Services provided by the Company’s auditors and network firms 
During the financial year the Group obtained the following services from the Company’s auditor and its associates as  
detailed below: 

Audit services 
Annual audit fees for the Company and the consolidated accounts
Other services 
Audit of subsidiary companies 
Tax advisory services 
Other services 

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

0.2 

0.1 
0.1 
0.1 

0.2

0.1
0.1
–

It is cost effective for the Group that such other services are provided by its auditors in view of their knowledge of the  
Group’s affairs. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
100 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

7 Employees 

Wages and salaries 
Social security costs  
Pension costs (note 23) 
Share-based payments (note 28)  
Total employment costs  

Average number of employees (including key management):
–  Full time  
–  Part time  

Total 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
337.6 
21.4 
2.1 
1.5 
362.6 

1 September 
2012
£m
336.1
21.9
0.4
1.6
360.0

Number 

Number

8,086 
22,077 

30,163 

8,355
21,762

30,117

Information concerning directors’ remuneration, interest in shares and share options is included in the directors’ remuneration 
report on pages 67 to 82, which forms part of these financial statements. 

Key management compensation 

Salaries and short-term employee benefits 
Post-employment benefits 
Share-based payments 
Termination payments 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
2.9 
0.4 
1.1 
– 
4.4 

1 September 
2012
£m
2.8
0.5
0.5
1.0
4.8

Members of the executive committee (which includes the executive directors) and the non-executive directors are deemed  
to be key management. It is the board who has responsibility for planning and controlling the activities of the Group. During  
the financial year key management consisted of 13 members (2012:12 members).  

8 Finance income 

Interest on bank deposits  
Other financing income 

9 Finance costs 

Bank loans and overdrafts 
Cash flow hedges reclassified and reported in the income statement
Amortisation of issue costs on loans (note 20)  
Interest payable on finance leases 
Other financing costs 
Capitalised finance costs – qualifying assets 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
0.4 
1.1 
1.5 

1 September 
2012
£m
0.1
1.1
1.2

31 August 
2013 
£m 
10.8 
3.3 
2.7 
0.1 
– 
(1.4)
15.5 

1 September 
2012
£m
11.7
2.0
2.9
0.1
1.2
–
17.9

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
101 

10 Taxation 
Analysis of tax charge in the financial year 

Current tax 
UK corporation tax charge on profit for the financial year
Adjustments in respect of prior periods  
Current tax expense  
Deferred taxation 
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Pension cost relief in excess of pension charge 
Adjustments in respect of prior periods 
Deferred tax charge/(credit) (note 24)  
Tax charge for the financial year 

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

36.7 
(10.8)
25.9 

(4.4)
2.9 
1.7 
0.2 
26.1 

43.4
(8.9)
34.5

(3.8)
2.9
(0.6)
(1.5)
33.0

The effective tax rate for the financial year is lower at 16.9% (2012: 20.8%) than the rate of corporation tax in the UK of 23.6% 
(2012: 25.2%). The differences are explained below: 

Profit on ordinary activities before tax  
Profit on ordinary activities at standard rate of corporation tax in the UK of 23.6% (2012: 25.2%) 
Effects of: 
Permanent differences 
Overseas tax rates 
Utilisation of tax losses  
Non-qualifying depreciation and lease transactions 
Effect on deferred taxation of the change in corporation tax rate
Adjustments in relation to prior periods 
Tax charge for the financial year 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
154.0 
36.3 

1 September 
2012
£m
158.3
39.9

– 
0.5 
(4.7)
1.5 
1.6 
(9.1)
26.1 

4.0
1.5
(3.1)
0.4
(0.2)
(9.5)
33.0

The Finance Act 2013, which became substantively enacted on 2 July 2013, included legislation reducing the main rate of 
corporation tax from 23.0% to 21.0% from 1 April 2014 with a further reduction in the main rate of corporation tax to 20.0%  
from 1 April 2015. 

The effect of the reduction in the corporation tax rate enacted in the Finance Act 2013 has been to reduce the net deferred tax 
asset recognised at 1 September 2012 by approximately £2.2 million. This £2.2 million decrease has been recognised in line with 
the treatment of the assets and liabilities giving rise to the net deferred tax asset. 

The prior year adjustment of £9.1 million relates to the reassessment of historic tax liabilities no longer considered likely to arise. 

11 Dividends 

Final paid 2.3 pence (2012: 2.0 pence) per £0.0001 share
–  Settled in cash 
Interim paid 1.0 pence (2012: 1.0 pence) per £0.0001 share
–  Settled in cash 

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

28.9 

12.5 
41.4 

25.6

12.9
38.5

A final dividend of 2.3 pence per share (2012: 2.0 pence per share) was paid during the financial year in respect of the financial 
year ended 1 September 2012, together with an interim dividend of 1.0 pence per share (2012: 1.0 pence per share) in respect 
of the financial year ended 31 August 2013. The directors are proposing a final dividend in respect of the financial year ended 
31 August 2013 of 2.4 pence per share (2012: 2.3 pence per share), which will absorb an estimated £29.4 million (2012: £28.9 
million) of shareholders’ funds. It will be paid on 10 January 2014 to shareholders who are on the register of members at close  
of business on 6 December 2013. No liability is recorded in the financial statements in respect of the final dividend as it was  
not approved as at the balance sheet date. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
102 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

12 Earnings per share 
Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the earnings attributable to ordinary shareholders by the weighted average 
number of ordinary shares in issue during the financial year, excluding any shares purchased by the Company and held as 
treasury shares. For diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue is adjusted to assume 
conversion of all dilutive potential ordinary shares. The Group has one class of dilutive potential ordinary shares, those share 
options granted to employees where the exercise price is less than the market price of the Company’s ordinary shares during 
the financial year. 

Basic and diluted earnings per share 

Profit for the financial year after taxation 

Weighted average number of shares 
Shares held by ESOP (weighted) 
Shares issuable (weighted) 
Adjusted weighted average number of shares 

Earnings per share 

13 Intangible assets 

Cost 
At 3 September 2011  
Additions 
Exchange rate movement 
Disposals 
At 1 September 2012 
Additions 
Exchange rate movement 
Disposals 
At 31 August 2013 
Accumulated amortisation 
At 3 September 2011  
Charge for the financial year 
Exchange rate movement 
Disposals 
At 1 September 2012 
Charge for the financial year 
Exchange rate movement 
Disposals 
At 31 August 2013 
Net book value 
At 31 August 2013 
At 1 September 2012 
At 3 September 2011 

31 August 2013

1 September 2012

Basic 
£m
127.9

Number 
m
1,255.1
(0.6)
–
1,254.5

Diluted  
£m 
127.9 

Number  
m 
1,255.1 
(0.6) 
2.1 
1,256.6 

Basic 
£m 
125.3 

Number 
 m 
1,282.0 
(0.7)
– 
1,281.3 

Diluted 
£m
125.3

Number 
m
1,282.0
(0.7)
1.4
1,282.7

Pence 
per share
10.2

Pence  
per share 
10.2 

Pence 
per share 
9.8 

Pence 
per share
9.8

Acquired 
licences and 
trademarks 
£m

Internally 
generated 
software  
£m 

Purchased 
software 
£m 

Goodwill 
£m

819.2
–
(0.7)
–
818.5
–
0.5
–
819.0

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

819.0
818.5
819.2

7.2
–
–
–
7.2
–
–
–
7.2

1.6
0.7
–
–
2.3
0.7
–
–
3.0

4.2
4.9
5.6

71.3 
14.6 
(0.9) 
(0.7) 
84.3 
19.3 
0.5 
(2.8) 
101.3 

40.5 
7.2 
(0.2) 
(0.7) 
46.8 
8.0 
0.4 
(2.8) 
52.4 

48.9 
37.5 
30.8 

9.4 
2.8 
– 
(0.1)
12.1 
1.7 
0.1 
(0.2)
13.7 

6.9 
1.3 
– 
(0.1)
8.1 
1.5 
(0.1)
(0.2)
9.3 

4.4 
4.0 
2.5 

Total 
£m

907.1
17.4
(1.6)
(0.8)
922.1
21.0
1.1
(3.0)
941.2

49.0
9.2
(0.2)
(0.8)
57.2
10.2
0.3
(3.0)
64.7

876.5
864.9
858.1

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
103 

Expenditure during the financial year on assets in the course of construction, included in software, was as follows: 

Assets in the course of construction  

Amortisation of intangible assets 
Amortisation on the Group’s intangible assets has been charged to the income statement as follows: 

Included within: 
–  Cost of sales 
–  Distribution costs  
–  Administrative expenses  

Intangible assets includes the following assets held under finance leases: 

Cost 
Accumulated amortisation 
Net book value  

31 August 
2013 
£m 
15.4 

1 September 
2012
£m
9.1

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

8.4 
0.2 
1.6 
10.2 

7.7
0.2
1.3
9.2

Purchased software

31 August 
2013 
£m 
1.5 
(1.3)
0.2 

1 September 
2012
£m
1.5
(0.8)
0.7

Impairment test for goodwill 
Goodwill is not amortised but is reviewed on an annual basis or more frequently if there are indications that goodwill may  
be impaired. Goodwill represents the goodwill for a portfolio of sites, which has been allocated to groups of cash-generating 
units (“CGUs”) split on a regional basis according to the level at which management monitors that goodwill. This allocation was 
primarily undertaken subsequent to the acquisition in December 2003 of the Debenhams stores by Debenhams plc. The CGUs 
are set out below: 

Goodwill – 31 August 2013 

North  
£m 
155.7 

Midlands 
£m
180.1

South-East 
£m
176.0

South-West 
£m
181.1

South  
£m 
100.6 

Other 
£m 
25.5 

Total 
£m
819.0

For the purposes of this impairment review, the recoverable amounts of the CGUs are determined based on value-in-use 
calculations. These cash flow projections are based on financial budgets approved by management covering a five year  
period. The key assumptions used in these projections are sales growth and discount rates. The five year plan is built up  
using management’s previous experience and incorporates management’s view of current economic conditions and trading 
expectations. Cash flows beyond the five year period are extrapolated based on the assumption of 2% (2012: 2%) growth after 
year five. The growth rates do not exceed the long-term average growth rate for the retail sector in which the CGUs operate. 
The post-tax discount rate used to calculate the value-in-use was 7.4% (2012: 8.2%) and reflects the specific risks in the retail 
business. The pre-tax discount rate is 7.6% (2012: 8.4%). 

Management determined the gross margin for each CGU based on performance of individual stores and its expectations  
for the market development. The weighted average growth rates used are consistent with the forecasts included in industry 
reports. The discount rates used are post-tax and risk-free rates. Based on the value-in-use calculations, there is substantial 
headroom on a region by region basis and a reasonably possible change in the assumptions used would not cause an 
impairment to goodwill. 

As a result of the impairment review, as at 31 August 2013 no impairment of goodwill has been required (2012: £nil). 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
104 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

14 Property, plant and equipment 

Cost 
At 3 September 2011 
Additions 
Exchange rate movements 
Disposals and write-offs 
At 1 September 2012 
Additions 
Exchange rate movements 
Disposals and write-offs 
At 31 August 2013 

Accumulated depreciation 
At 3 September 2011 
Charge for the financial year 
Exchange rate movements 
Disposals and write-offs 
At 1 September 2012 
Charge for the financial year 
Exchange rate movements 
Disposals and write-offs 
At 31 August 2013 

Net book value 
At 31 August 2013 

At 1 September 2012 

At 3 September 2011 

Land and buildings

Long
 leasehold 
£m

Short leasehold 
fixtures and 
fittings  
£m 

Vehicles, 
fixtures and 
equipment 
£m 

Freehold 
£m

1.6
–
–
–
1.6
–
–
–
1.6

0.2
–
–
–
0.2
–
–
–
0.2

1.4

1.4

1.4

6.7
0.4
–
–
7.1
0.6
–
–
7.7

0.6
0.1
–
–
0.7
0.3
–
–
1.0

6.7

6.4

6.1

351.4 
2.8 
(1.3) 
(0.3) 
352.6 
12.2 
1.0 
(0.1) 
365.7 

97.8 
14.9 
(0.3) 
(0.3) 
112.1 
15.1 
0.4 
(0.1) 
127.5 

238.2 

240.5 

253.6 

818.3 
110.2 
(7.4)
(39.0)
882.1 
99.8 
5.5 
(61.3)
926.1 

444.8 
67.4 
(4.6)
(38.8)
468.8 
69.0 
3.6 
(61.1)
480.3 

445.8 

413.3 

373.5 

Total 
£m

1,178.0
113.4
(8.7)
(39.3)
1,243.4
112.6
6.5
(61.4)
1,301.1

543.4
82.4
(4.9)
(39.1)
581.8
84.4
4.0
(61.2)
609.0

692.1

661.6

634.6

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
105 

Expenditure during the financial year on assets in the course of construction included primarily in vehicles, fixtures and 
equipment was as follows: 

Assets in the course of construction  

31 August 
2013 
£m 
53.9 

1 September 
2012
£m
49.9

Property, plant and equipment includes the following assets held under finance leases included primarily in vehicles, fixtures 
and equipment was as follows: 

Cost 
Accumulated depreciation 
Net book value  

31 August 
2013 
£m 
9.1 
(2.7)
6.4 

1 September 
2012
£m
10.7
(3.5)
7.2

Contractual commitments at 31 August 2013 were £3.8 million (2012: £14.9 million). 

Capitalised finance costs 
Finance costs capitalised on qualifying assets included in additions amounted to £1.4 million (2012: £nil). Accumulated finance 
costs capitalised included in the cost of property, plant and equipment net of disposals amounted to £1.4 million (2012: £nil).  
In previous years there were no qualifying assets available for capitalisation. The capitalisation rate used to determine the 
amount of borrowing costs eligible for capitalisation is 3.1% (2012: not applicable). 

15 Financial assets – available-for-sale investments 

At 3 September 2011 
Decrease in the market value charged to the statement of comprehensive income
At 1 September 2012 
Decrease in the market value charged to the statement of comprehensive income
At 31 August 2013 

£m
2.6
(0.7)
1.9
(0.8)
1.1

The Group holds 10% (2012: 10%) of the issued shares of Ermes Department Stores Limited (“Ermes”), a company listed on the 
Cyprus Stock Exchange whose shares are quoted in Euros. The market value of the shares at 31 August 2013 was £1.1 million 
(2012: £1.9 million). Ermes is a company that is registered and trades in Cyprus. 

16 Inventories 

Items held for resale 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
357.9 

1 September 
2012
£m
332.3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
106 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

17 Trade and other receivables 

Non-current 
Other receivables 

Other receivables include contractual lease deposits of £16.6 million (2012: £15.5 million). 

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

16.8 

19.3

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012
£m

Current 
Trade receivables 
Allowance for doubtful debts  

Other receivables 
Prepayments and accrued income

20.5 
(0.7)
19.8 
1.1 
57.4 
78.3 

At the year end, £18.1 million (2012: £19.1 million) of the trade receivables were denominated in sterling, £0.2 million 
(2012: £0.2 million) were denominated in Euros and £2.2 million (2012: £2.1 million) in Danish krone. 

The movement in the allowance for doubtful debts may be analysed as follows: 

At 3 September 2011  
Increase in provision 
At 1 September 2012 
Increase in provision 
At 31 August 2013 

21.4
(0.5)
20.9
2.3
52.2
75.4

£m
(0.2)
(0.3)
(0.5)
(0.2)
(0.7)

Trade receivables which are past their due date but not impaired amount to £1.9 million (2012: £4.0 million). Trade receivables 
which are past their due date are provided based on estimated irrecoverable amounts from the sale of goods. At 31 August 
2013, £0.7 million (2012: £0.5 million) of trade receivables were past their due date and impaired. 

18 Cash and cash equivalents 

Cash at bank and in hand 
Short-term bank deposits 

31 August 
2013 
£m 
27.0 
– 
27.0 

1 September 
2012
£m
28.7
15.3
44.0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
107 

19 Trade and other payables 

Trade payables 
Other payables 
Taxation and social security 
Accruals  
Deferred income  

20 Bank overdraft and borrowings 

Current 
Bank overdraft 
Revolving credit facility(1) 
Lease obligations 
Total current borrowings 

Non-current 
Term loan facility(2) 
Lease obligations 
Total non-current borrowings 
Total current and non-current borrowings 

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
345.0 
67.9 
24.4 
103.7 
4.8 
545.8 

1 September
 2012
£m
318.3
65.3
24.7
115.0
2.1
525.4

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 

1 September
 2012
£m

2.9 
158.4 
1.8 
163.1 

232.8 
3.1 
235.9 
399.0 

9.4
151.8
2.2
163.4

244.8
4.5
249.3
412.7

(1)  Revolving credit facility is stated net of unamortised issue costs of £2.5 million (2012: £3.2 million). 
(2)  Term loan facility is stated net of unamortised issue costs of £3.7 million (2012: £5.2 million). 

The Group has a £650.0 million credit facility comprising a term loan of £250.0 million and a Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”) 
of £400.0 million. £100.0 million of these facilities expire in October 2015 (of which a group company holds £35.0 million), with 
the balance extending to October 2016. At 31 August 2013, the Group’s facilities outstanding comprised the term loan of 
£236.5 million (2012: £250.0 million) and RCF drawings of £160.9 million (2012: £155.0 million). 

During the current and prior financial years, the Group has complied with its covenants relating to its credit facilities. 

Issue costs, which mainly relate to facility costs, are being amortised over the term of the facilities to October 2016 at the 
effective interest rate based on the committed amount of the term loan. The total amortisation charge relating to the issue 
costs of the Group’s credit facilities for the financial year ended 31 August 2013 was £2.7 million (2012: £2.9 million). 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
108 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

20 Bank overdraft and borrowings continued 

Finance lease obligations 
Finance lease obligations relate mainly to software, vehicles, fixtures and equipment leased under hire purchase contracts. 

The minimum lease payments under finance leases fall due as follows: 

Not later than one year 
Later than one year but not later than five years 

Interest element of future instalments 
Present value of finance lease obligations 

The present value of finance lease obligations may be analysed as follows: 

Not later than one year 
Later than one year but not later than five years 

Maturity of borrowings 
The maturities of the Group’s borrowings at carrying value are as follows: 

Amounts falling due: 
In one year or less or on demand 
In more than one year but not more than two years 
In more than two years but not more than five years 

Interest rates 
The effective interest rates at the balance sheet dates were as follows: 

Bank overdraft  
Term loan facility  
Revolving credit facility 
Lease obligations  

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
2.0 
3.2 
5.2 
(0.3)
4.9 

1 September
 2012
£m
2.4
4.7
7.1
(0.4)
6.7

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
1.8 
3.1 
4.9 

1 September
 2012
£m
2.2
4.5
6.7

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 

1 September
 2012
£m

163.1 
1.8 
234.1 
399.0 

163.4
1.7
247.6
412.7

31 August 
 2013 
% 
1.88 
2.24 
2.24 
4.09 

1 September
 2012
%
1.88
2.29
2.29
3.57

Borrowing facilities 
The Group has the following undrawn committed facilities available at 31 August 2013, in respect of which all conditions 
precedent had been met as at that date: 

Expiring within one year 
Expiring between one and two years 
Expiring between two and five years 

31 August 
 2013 
£m 
– 
– 
217.6 
217.6 

1 September
 2012
£m
–
–
245.0
245.0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
109 

21 Financial risk management 

a) Financial risks and treasury management 
The Group conducts its treasury activities within the remit of a treasury policy, which outlines approved policies, procedures  
and authority levels. The board delegates its responsibility for reviewing and approving treasury policy to the Audit Committee. 
Reports are prepared monthly covering all areas of treasury activity and policy compliance and are reviewed by the Chief 
Financial Officer. The board and Audit Committee receive regular reports covering treasury activities and policy compliance. 
Group treasury manages the Group’s funding requirements and financial risks in line with the agreed treasury policies  
and procedures. 

The Group’s financial instruments, other than derivatives, primarily include borrowings, cash and liquid resources, available-for-
sale assets, trade receivables and trade payables. The main purpose of these financial instruments is to manage liquidity or raise 
finance for the Group. 

Group treasury uses derivative financial instruments to manage its interest rate risks associated with the Group’s financing  
and currency risk arising from the Group’s operations. The derivatives used are mainly interest rate swaps and forward  
currency contracts. 

The Group’s activities expose it to a variety of financial risks, which include: 
•  Funding and liquidity risk 
•  Credit risk 
•  Foreign exchange risk 
•  Interest rate risk 
•  Other price risk 

The Group’s overall risk management programme focuses on the unpredictability of financial markets and seeks to minimise 
potential adverse effects on the Group’s financial performance. The Group uses derivative financial instruments to hedge 
certain risk exposures. 

The policies and strategies for managing these risks are summarised as follows: 

i) Funding and liquidity risk 
Prudent liquidity risk management implies sufficient cash and marketable securities, the availability of funding through an 
adequate amount of committed credit facilities and the ability to close out market positions. Due to the dynamic nature of the 
underlying business, Group treasury aims to maintain flexibility in funding by keeping committed credit lines available. 

The Group finances its operations by a combination of retained profits, debt finance and leases. Group treasury monitors rolling 
forecasts of the Group’s liquidity requirements to ensure it has sufficient cash or working capital facility to meet the cash flow 
and covenant requirements of the Group and the current business plan. 

Surplus cash held by the operating entities over and above balances required for working capital management are transferred 
to Group treasury. Group treasury invests surplus cash in interest bearing current accounts, term deposits, money market 
deposits and marketable securities, choosing instruments with appropriate maturities or sufficient liquidity to provide sufficient 
headroom as determined by the above-mentioned forecasts. 

The table below shows the maturity analysis of the Group’s net contractual undiscounted cash flows in respect of non-derivative 
financial liabilities and derivative assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date. 

At 31 August 2013 
Non-derivative financial liabilities
Borrowings 
Interest payments due on borrowings 
Finance lease liabilities 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial assets and liabilities 
Interest rate swaps 
–  Net settled derivative contracts – payments 
Forward foreign exchange contracts 
–  Gross settled derivative contracts – receipts 
–  Gross settled derivative contracts – payments 
Total 

Less than 
one year 
£m

One to  
two years  
£m 

Two to 
five years 
£m 

More than 
five years 
£m

(163.7)
(5.3)
(2.0)
(483.0)

– 
(5.3) 
(1.9) 
– 

(236.5)
(6.2)
(1.3)
– 

(2.9)

(2.2) 

(2.8)

343.8
(337.9)
(651.0)

84.2 
(83.2) 
(8.4) 

– 
– 
(246.8)

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
110 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

21 Financial risk management continued 

a) Financial risks and treasury management continued 
i) Funding and liquidity risk continued 

At 1 September 2012 
Non-derivative financial liabilities 
Borrowings 
Interest payments due on borrowings 
Finance lease liabilities 
Trade and other payables 
Derivative financial assets and liabilities 
Interest rate swaps 
–  Net settled derivative contracts – payments 
Forward foreign exchange contracts 
–  Gross settled derivative contracts – receipts 
–  Gross settled derivative contracts – payments 
Total 

Less than 
one year 
£m

One to  
two years  
£m 

Two to 
five years 
£m 

More than 
five years 
£m

(164.4)
(5.7)
(2.4)
(473.1)

– 
(5.7) 
(1.8) 
– 

(250.0)
(6.7)
(1.7)
– 

(3.0)

(2.5) 

(2.3)

373.2
(367.6)
(643.0)

131.6 
(130.9) 
(9.3) 

– 
– 
(260.7)

–
–
(1.2)
–

–

–
–
(1.2)

ii) Credit risk 
Credit risk is the risk that the Group may suffer financial loss through default by customers or financial institutions. The Group 
has no significant concentrations of credit risk. Sales to retail customers are made in cash or by credit and debit cards; wholesale 
sales of products to franchisees are made to customers with an appropriate credit history. Derivative counterparties and cash 
transactions are limited to high credit-quality financial institutions. The Group has policies that limit the amount of credit 
exposure to any one financial institution. The Group’s policy requires that cash surpluses are placed on deposit for no longer 
than three months and only with counterparties with a credit rating of A- or A3 or higher as assigned by Standard & Poor’s or 
Moody’s respectively. Exceptions to this policy require board approval. 

The Group considers its maximum credit risk to be £75.0 million (2012: £97.0 million) being the Group’s total financial assets as 
shown in note 22. 

iii) Foreign exchange risk 
The Group operates internationally and is exposed to foreign exchange risk arising from various currency exposures, primarily 
with respect to the US dollar, the Euro, the Chinese yuan and to a lesser extent the Danish krone. 

To manage the foreign exchange transaction risk, entities in the Group use forward currency contracts transacted by Group 
treasury. Foreign exchange risk arises when commercial transactions are denominated in a currency that is not the entity’s 
functional currency. Group treasury is responsible for managing the exposure in each foreign currency by using external forward 
currency contracts with a settlement of up to two years. Forecast cash flows are hedged to the extent that those cash flows are 
deemed highly probable. The Group regularly reviews the need to hedge foreign exchange exposure arising from the profits, 
assets and liabilities of its non-sterling businesses, hedging those exposures to the extent that they are considered appropriate 
for hedging. 

A gain of £7.6 million (2012: £1.9 million) was reclassified from equity to the income statement within cost of sales during the 
year in respect of forward foreign exchange contracts designated as cash flow hedges. 

The notional value of open forward foreign exchange contracts at 31 August 2013 was £420.4 million (2012: £503.7 million). 
The net fair value gains on open forward foreign exchange contracts at 31 August 2013 were £5.3 million (2012: £5.0 million). 
This will be recycled and adjusted against the initial measurement of the acquisition cost of inventory over the next two years. 

During the current and prior financial years there were no contracts reclassified to “held for trading” due to cash flow hedges  
being ineffective. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
111 

iv) Interest rate risk 
The Group’s interest rate risk arises from long-term borrowings. The Group’s current borrowing facilities are issued at variable 
rates that expose the Group to cash flow interest rate risk. 

The interest exposure of the Group is managed within the constraints of the Group’s business plan and the financial covenants 
under its facilities. The aim is to reduce exposure to interest rate movements and to take advantage of low interest rates by 
hedging an appropriate amount of interest rate exposure whilst maintaining the flexibility to minimise early termination costs. 
The Group’s interest rate hedging strategy is to achieve a target fixed percentage of 75%, with a 15% tolerance (60%-90%). 

The impact of movements in interest rates is managed through the use of floating rate debt and interest rate swaps. These are 
usually matched with specific loans for a period of time up to their maturity or call date. 

The Group’s main interest rate exposure is from the floating rate loans under the credit facilities. At the year end the 
Group’s hedged borrowings amounted to £330.0 million (2012: £330.0 million), being 81.4% (2012: 78.3%) of the Group’s 
total borrowings.  

Interest rate swaps 
The Group’s interest rate swaps switch interest from floating rates to fixed rates. The Group’s interest rate swap portfolio  
is summarised as follows: 

Interest rate swaps 

Notional 
£m
330.0 

Rate  
% 

Maturity
0.94%-1.865%  October 2013 to 
October 2015

The notional principal amount of interest rate swaps at 31 August 2013 was £330.0 million (2012: £330.0 million). The net gains 
and losses on these swaps, which are deferred in equity, will reverse through interest in the income statement over the life of 
the swaps. During the financial year a loss of £3.3 million (2012: £2.0 million) was reclassified and reported in the income 
statement in respect of interest rate swaps. 

Financial liabilities and assets 
The interest rate profiles of financial liabilities after taking account of interest rate swaps, swapped from floating to fixed rates, 
used to manage interest were as follows: 

Financial liabilities 
Sterling(1) 

31 August 2013

Fixed 
£m

Floating 
£m

Total 
£m

1 September 2012

Fixed  
£m 

Floating 
£m 

Total 
£m

(334.9)

(70.3)

(405.2)

(336.7) 

(84.4)

(421.1)

(1) Debt issue costs of £6.2 million (2012: £8.4 million) are excluded from the financial liabilities above. 

Fixed sterling financial liabilities comprise the hedged portion of the debt facility of £330.0 million (2012: £330.0 million) and 
finance lease liabilities of £4.9 million (2012: £6.7 million) at 31 August 2013. The weighted average interest rate on the fixed rate 
borrowings as at 31 August 2013 was 3.3% (2012: 3.3%), with the weighted average time for which rates are fixed being 3.2 years 
(2012: 3.2 years). Floating rate borrowings are interest bearing at interest rates based on LIBOR. Cash deposits are interest 
bearing at rates based on LIBID or relevant base rates. Non-interest bearing cash refers to cash in stores or in transit. 

Floating rate borrowings have been classified as fixed if there were derivative financial instruments hedging the floating rate 
interest for more than one year. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
112 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

21 Financial risk management continued 

a) Financial risks and treasury management continued 
iv) Interest rate risk continued 
The interest rate profiles of financial assets were as follows: 

Financial assets 
Sterling 
Euro 
US dollar 
Danish krone 
Chinese yuan 
Other 

Total financial assets 

31 August 2013
Non-interest 
bearing 
£m

Floating 
£m

0.1
0.4
0.1
–
0.7
0.2

1.5

22.8
1.8
0.5
–
–
0.4

25.5

1 September 2012
Non-interest 
bearing 
£m 

 Floating  
£m 

13.4 
1.3 
0.3 
– 
0.3 
– 

15.3 

23.8 
1.9 
0.5 
1.9 
– 
0.6 

28.7 

Total 
£m

22.9
2.2
0.6
–
0.7
0.6

27.0

Total 
£m

37.2
3.2
0.8
1.9
0.3
0.6

44.0

v) Other price risk 
The Group is exposed to price risk arising from equity investments. 

The sensitivity analysis below has been determined based on the exposure to equity price risk at the reporting date. At the year 
end, if the market value of equity investments had been 10% higher/lower, when all other variables were held constant: 
•  Net profit would have been unaffected as the equity investments were classified as available-for-sale investments 
•  Other reserves would decrease/increase by £0.1 million (2012: £0.2 million) for the Group as a result of the changes in the fair 

value of available-for-sale investments 

The above movement in rates is considered to represent reasonable possible changes. Other larger or smaller changes are 
also possible. 

b) Capital management 
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern, provide 
returns for shareholders and benefits to other stakeholders and to maintain a structure to optimise the cost of capital. The 
Group defines capital as debt and equity. 

In order to maintain or adjust the capital structure, the Group may consider: the amount of dividend paid to shareholders,  
the return of capital to shareholders, the issue or sale of shares or the sale of assets to reduce debt. 

The Group routinely monitors its capital and liquidity requirements through leverage ratios consistent with industry-wide 
borrowing standards, maintaining suitable headroom to bank facility fixed charge and leverage covenants together with  
credit market requirements to ensure financing requirements continue to be serviceable. 

c) Fair value estimates 
The fair value of interest rate swaps is calculated as the present value of the estimated future cash flows. The fair value of 
forward currency contracts has been determined based on discounted market forward currency exchange rates at the balance 
sheet date. 

The fair values of short-term deposits, loans and overdrafts with a maturity of less than one year are assumed to approximate 
to their book values. In the case of the Group’s loans due in more than one year, the fair value of financial liabilities for 
disclosure purposes is estimated by discounting the future contractual cash flows at the current market interest rates 
available to the Group. 

Note 22 shows the carrying value and fair value of financial assets and liabilities. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
113 

d) Sensitivity analysis 
The Group monitors interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk by determining the effect on profit of a range of possible 
changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates. The range of sensitivities chosen, being 1% movement in the interest rate 
or 5% movement in sterling when compared to US dollar, Chinese yuan, Danish krone and Euro, reflects the Group’s view of 
reasonably possible changes to these risk variables which existed at the year end. 

The table below illustrates the estimated impact on the Group as a result of market movements in interest rates in relation to all 
the Group’s financial instruments that are expressed in currencies different to that of the functional currency. The analysis has 
been produced assuming no changes in the borrowings and existing interest rate swaps portfolio when considering the interest 
rate movement. 

1% increase in interest rate 

31 August 2013
Income 
statement
loss
£m
(0.7)

Equity  
gain 
£m 
7.5 

1 September 2012
Income 
statement 
loss 
£m 
(0.7)

Equity 
gain
£m
7.5

A 1% decrease in interest rate would result in an equal and opposite change in the income statement and equity respectively. 

The table below illustrates the estimated impact on the Group as a result of market movements in foreign exchange rates in 
relation to all the Group’s financial instruments. 

5% weakening in sterling compared to US dollar 
5% weakening in sterling compared to the Euro 
5% weakening in sterling compared to Danish krone
5% weakening in sterling compared to Chinese yuan

31 August 2013
Income 
statement 
gain/(loss) 
£m
1.6
(0.6)
(0.4)
0.3

Equity  
gain/(loss)  
£m 
10.6 
(1.5) 
– 
1.6 

1 September 2012
Income 
statement 
gain/(loss) 
 £m 
0.1 
(0.3)
(0.4)
– 

Equity 
gain/(loss) 
£m
12.1
(2.4)
–
1.7

A 5% strengthening in sterling compared to the US dollar, Euro, Danish krone or Chinese yuan would result in an equal and 
opposite change in the income statement and equity respectively. 

 
 
 
 
 
114 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

22 Financial instruments 

Financial assets and liabilities by category 
Information regarding the Group’s financial risk management policies has been disclosed in note 21. The following table sets 
out the classification, carrying value and fair value of each class of financial assets and liabilities within the financial statements: 

Total 
fair value 
£m 

Total
carrying 
value 
£m

Available- 
for-sale
£m

Held for 
trading 
£m

Derivatives 
designated  
as cash flow 
hedges  
£m 

Loans and
receivables and 
financial liabilities at 
amortised cost 
£m

At 31 August 2013 
Assets 
Current assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Non-current assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Available-for-sale financial assets 
Interest rate swaps 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Total financial assets 
Liabilities 
Current liabilities 
Trade and other payables 
Current borrowings 
Interest rate swaps 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Non-current liabilities 
Non-current borrowings 
Interest rate swaps 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Total financial liabilities 
Total 
At 1 September 2012 
Assets 
Current assets 
Cash and cash equivalents 
Trade and other receivables 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Non-current assets 
Trade and other receivables 
Available-for-sale financial assets 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Total financial assets 
Liabilities 
Current liabilities 
Trade and other payables 
Current borrowings 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Non-current liabilities 
Non-current borrowings 
Interest rate swaps 
Forward foreign currency contracts
Total financial liabilities 
Total 

27.0 
20.9 
7.3 

16.8 
1.1 
0.7 
1.2 
75.0 

(516.8) 
(163.1) 
(0.5) 
(1.6) 

(235.9) 
(3.4) 
(0.3) 
(921.6) 
(846.6) 

44.0 
23.2 
7.8 

19.3 
1.9 
0.8 
97.0 

(498.5) 
(163.4) 
(1.9) 

(249.3) 
(8.3) 
(0.6) 
(922.0) 
(825.0) 

27.0
20.9
7.3

16.8
1.1
0.7
1.2
75.0

(516.8)
(163.1)
(0.5)
(1.6)

(235.9)
(3.4)
(0.3)
(921.6)
(846.6)

44.0
23.2
7.8

19.3
1.9
0.8
97.0

(498.5)
(163.4)
(1.9)

(249.3)
(8.3)
(0.6)
(922.0)
(825.0)

–
–
–

–
1.1
–
–
1.1

–
–
–
–

–
–
–
–
1.1

–
–
–

–
1.9
–
1.9

–
–
–

–
–
–
–
1.9

–
–
1.5

–
–
–
–
1.5

–
–
–
(0.1)

–
–
–
(0.1)
1.4

–
–
1.2

–
–
–
1.2

–
–
(0.1)

–
–
–
(0.1)
1.1

– 
– 
5.8 

– 
– 
0.7 
1.2 
7.7 

– 
– 
(0.5) 
(1.5) 

– 
(3.4) 
(0.3) 
(5.7) 
2.0 

– 
– 
6.6 

– 
– 
0.8 
7.4 

– 
– 
(1.8) 

– 
(8.3) 
(0.6) 
(10.7) 
(3.3) 

27.0
20.9
–

16.8
–
–
–
64.7

(516.8)
(163.1)
–
–

(235.9)
–
–
(915.8)
(851.1)

44.0
23.2
–

19.3
–
–
86.5

(498.5)
(163.4)
–

(249.3)
–
–
(911.2)
(824.7)

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
115 

Fair value measurement 
The Group has adopted the amendment to IFRS 7 (“Financial Instruments: Disclosures”) which requires financial instruments  
to be grouped into a fair value hierarchy based on the lowest level input that is significant to the fair value measurement.  
The three levels of the hierarchy are: 
•  Level 1 – Quoted prices (unadjusted) based on active markets for identical assets or liabilities 
•  Level 2 – Inputs other than quoted prices included within level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly  

(that is, prices) or indirectly (that is, derived from prices) 

•  Level 3 – Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data 

The following table shows the Group’s financial assets and liabilities that are measured at fair value: 

Level 1 
£m

Level 2  
£m 

Level 3 
£m 

Total 
£m

At 31 August 2013 
Assets 
Available-for-sale financial assets 
Derivative financial instruments: 
–  Interest rate swaps held as cash flow hedges 
–  Forward foreign currency contracts held as cash flow hedges
–  Other forward foreign currency contracts 
Total assets 

Liabilities 
Derivative financial instruments: 
–  Interest rate swaps held as cash flow hedges 
–  Forward foreign currency contracts held as cash flow hedges
–  Other forward foreign currency contracts 
Total liabilities 

At 1 September 2012 
Assets 
Available-for-sale financial assets 
Derivative financial instruments: 
–  Forward foreign currency contracts held as cash flow hedges
–  Other forward foreign currency contracts 
Total assets 

Liabilities 
Derivative financial instruments: 
–  Interest rate swaps held as cash flow hedges 
–  Forward foreign currency contracts held as cash flow hedges
–  Other forward foreign currency contracts 
Total liabilities 

1.1

–
–
–
1.1

–
–
–
–

– 

0.7 
7.0 
1.5 
9.2 

(3.9) 
(1.8) 
(0.1) 
(5.8) 

– 

– 
– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 

Level 1 
£m

Level 2  
£m 

Level 3 
£m 

1.9

–
–
1.9

–
–
–
–

– 

7.4 
1.2 
8.6 

(8.3) 
(2.4) 
(0.1) 
(10.8) 

– 

– 
– 
– 

– 
– 
– 
– 

1.1

0.7
7.0
1.5
10.3

(3.9)
(1.8)
(0.1)
(5.8)

Total 
£m

1.9

7.4
1.2
10.5

(8.3)
(2.4)
(0.1)
(10.8)

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
116 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

23 Retirement benefit obligation 
The Group operates defined benefit type pension schemes, being the Debenhams Executive Pension Plan (“DEPP”) and the  
Debenhams Retirement Scheme (“DRS”) (together “the Group’s pension schemes”), the assets of which are held in separate  
trustee-administered funds. 

Both pension schemes were closed for future service accrual from 31 October 2006. The closure to future accrual will not affect  
the pensions of those who have retired or the deferred benefits of those who have left service or opted out before 31 October 
2006. Future pension arrangements are provided through a money purchase stakeholder plan in the UK and Hong Kong or a 
defined contribution scheme for the employees in the Republic of Ireland and Denmark. 

In accordance with the recovery plan for the Group’s pension schemes, which is intended to restore the schemes to a fully 
funded position on an ongoing basis, the Group agreed to contribute to the pension schemes £8.9 million per annum,  
on 1 April each year, for the period from 1 April 2012 to 31 August 2021 increasing by the percentage increase in the RPI  
over the year to the previous December. Additionally, the Group has agreed to cover the non-investment expenses and  
levies of the pension schemes, including those payable to the Pension Protection Fund. 

The investment strategy for the Group’s pension schemes was changed during the year ended 3 September 2011. 
Investment of the schemes’ assets is now arranged by AON Hewitt Limited under a delegated consulting service agreement. 
As at 31 August 2013 most of the schemes’ assets are invested in a delegated liability fund or a delegated growth fund,  
with some legacy holdings from the former investment strategy due to be transferred to the delegated consulting service 
arrangement in the future. 

Actuarial valuations of the Group’s pension schemes using the projected unit basis were carried out at 31 March 2011 and 
updated as at each relevant year end for the purposes of IAS 19 “Employee Benefits” by Towers Watson Limited, a qualified 
independent actuary. The 31 March 2011 actuarial valuation has been used when calculating the IAS 19 “Employee Benefits” 
valuation at 31 August 2013.  

The major assumptions used by the actuary were: 

Inflation assumption 
General salary and wage increase
Rate of increase in pension payments and deferred payments
Pension increase rate 
Discount rate 

31 August 
2013 
per annum 
% 
3.30 
3.30 
3.30 
3.00 
4.60 

1 September 
2012 
per annum 
%
2.90
2.90
2.90
2.80
4.70

The expected return on scheme assets is based on market expectations at the beginning of the year for return over the entire 
life of the defined benefit obligation. 

The inflation assumption is based on the RPI rate as pension increases both in payment and deferment within the schemes are 
set out with reference to this measure. 

31 August 2013

1 September 2012

Assets 
Delegated liability fund 
Delegated growth fund 
Legacy holdings 
Equities 
Bonds 
Property 
Cash and other assets 
Total market value of assets 
Present value of scheme liabilities
Net deficit in schemes 
Analysed as: 
DEPP scheme surplus/(deficit) 
DRS scheme deficit 

Long-term rate of 
return expected 
per annum
%

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7.0-7.4

Long-term rate of 
return expected 
per annum 
% 

– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
7.0-7.4 

£m

129.3
539.6
0.9
–
–
–
3.8
673.6
(693.6)
(20.0)

4.6
(24.6)

£m

105.5
464.2
1.7
–
–
–
12.3
583.7
(641.0)
(57.3)

(4.8)
(52.5)

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
117 

The expected rates of return on assets for the schemes have been derived from the target returns specified in the current 
Statement of Investment Principles for each scheme and have been set at 7.0% (2012: 7.0%) for the DEPP and 7.4% (2012: 7.4%) 
for the DRS.  

The current life expectancies of a pensioner retiring aged 65 underlying the mortality tables for each of the schemes above  
are as follows: 

Debenhams Retirement Scheme
Member currently aged 65 
Member aged 65 in 15 years 

Debenhams Executive Pension Plan 
Member currently aged 65  
Member aged 65 in 15 years  

The actual return on scheme assets was as follows: 

Return on scheme assets  

The amounts recognised in the income statement are as follows: 

Interest on pension scheme liabilities 
Expected return on pension scheme assets  
Total credit included within staff costs  

The total credits included are as follows: 

Cost of sales 
Distribution costs 
Administrative expenses  
Total credit  

Changes in the present value of the defined benefit obligations are as follows: 

Present value of obligations at start of the financial year
Interest on pension scheme liabilities 
Benefit payments by the fund 
Actuarial losses 
Present value of obligations at end of the financial year 

31 August 2013
Years 
Male

Years  
Female 

22.4
23.4

24.4 
25.5 

31 August 2013
Years 
Male

Years 
Female 

24.5
25.5

25.8 
27.0 

1 September 2012

Years 
Male 

22.4 
23.4 

Years 
Female

24.3
25.4

1 September 2012

Years 
Male 

24.4 
25.4 

Years 
Female

25.8
26.9

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
102.7 

1 September
 2012
£m
42.4

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
29.6 
(40.9)
(11.3)

1 September
 2012
£m
30.9
(42.6)
(11.7)

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
(9.4)
(0.1)
(1.8)
(11.3)

1 September
 2012
£m
(9.7)
(0.1)
(1.9)
(11.7)

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
641.0 
29.6 
(21.9)
44.9 
693.6 

1 September
 2012
£m
547.6
30.9
(18.2)
80.7
641.0

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
118 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

23 Retirement benefit obligation continued 
Changes in the fair value of pension scheme assets are as follows: 

Fair value of pension scheme assets at start of the financial year
Benefits paid  
Company contributions 
Expected return on pension scheme assets  
Actuarial gains/(losses) 
Fair value of pension scheme assets at end of the financial year 

Movement in (deficit)/surplus during the financial year: 

(Deficit)/surplus in the schemes at start of the financial year
Movement in the financial year: 
–  Pension credit  
–  Company contributions 
–  Net actuarial gains/(losses) 
Net deficit in the schemes at end of the financial year

Cumulative actuarial gains and losses recognised in the statement of comprehensive income: 

At start of the financial year 
Net actuarial gains/(losses) recognised in the financial year
Net actuarial losses recognised at end of the financial year 

History of experience gains and losses: 

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
583.7 
(21.9)
10.4 
40.9 
60.5 
673.6 

1 September
 2012
£m
551.5
(18.2)
9.4
42.6
(1.6)
583.7

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
(57.3)

1 September
 2012
£m
3.9

11.3 
10.4 
15.6 
(20.0)

11.7
9.4
(82.3)
(57.3)

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
(133.0)
15.6 
(117.4)

1 September
 2012
£m
(50.7)
(82.3)
(133.0)

Actuarial (gains)/losses arising on scheme assets 
Experience losses/(gains) arising on defined benefit 
obligation 
Present value of scheme liabilities
Fair value of scheme assets  
Net (deficit)/surplus 

31 August
2013 
£m
(60.5)

1 September 
2012 
£m
1.6

3 September  
2011 
£m 
(6.6) 

28 August 
2010 
£m 
 (12.0) 

29 August 
2009 
£m
62.7

2.4
(693.6)
673.6
(20.0)

6.9
(641.0)
583.7
(57.3)

(5.1) 
(547.6) 
551.5 
3.9 

7.6 
 (604.5) 
523.8 
 (80.7) 

(18.2) 
(542.0)
488.4
(53.6)

The contributions expected to be paid during the financial year ending 30 August 2014 amount to £10.8 million. 

Other Debenhams defined contribution schemes 
The Group contributions to other defined contribution schemes during the financial year were £13.4 million (2012: £12.0 million). 

 
 
 
 
119 

24 Deferred tax assets and liabilities 
Deferred tax is calculated in full on temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 22.2% (2012: 23.0%)  
for temporary differences expected to reverse within 12 months of the balance sheet date and 20.0% for temporary differences 
expected to reverse more than one year after the balance sheet date (2012: 23.0%) for the UK differences. Local tax rates have 
been used for overseas differences. 

Non-current 
Deferred tax assets  
Deferred tax liabilities 

Deferred tax expected to be reversed within 12 months of the balance sheet date: 

Deferred tax assets  
Deferred tax liabilities 

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 

1 September
 2012
£m

69.3 
(59.1)
10.2 

83.2
(64.7)
18.5

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
2.8 
(5.9)
(3.1)

1 September
 2012
£m
1.9
(9.1)
(7.2)

Deferred tax assets have been recognised in respect of temporary differences giving rise to deferred tax assets because it is 
probable that these assets will be recovered. 

The movement on the deferred tax account is as shown below: 

Assets 
At 3 September 2011 
(Charged)/credited to the income statement 
Result of the change in the standard rate of corporation 
tax (charged)/credited to the income statement 
Credited to the statement of comprehensive income
At 1 September 2012 
Credited/(charged) to the income statement 
Result of the change in the standard rate of corporation 
tax charged to the income statement 
Charged to the statement of comprehensive income
At 31 August 2013 

Developers’
contributions 
received 
£m
44.0
(6.8)

Fair value 
losses 
£m
4.4
(2.4)

Other  
provisions  
£m 
27.3 
9.1 

Retirement 
benefit 
asset 
£m 
– 
(2.9)

(2.9)
–
34.3
0.1

(4.5)
–
29.9

0.1
–
2.1
0.1

–
(1.2)
1.0

(2.8) 
– 
33.6 
4.3 

(4.4) 
– 
33.5 

0.2 
15.9 
13.2 
(2.6)

(0.3)
(5.4)
4.9 

Total 
£m
75.7
(3.0)

(5.4)
15.9
83.2
1.9

(9.2)
(6.6)
69.3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
120 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

24 Deferred tax assets and liabilities continued 

Liabilities 
At 3 September 2011 
Credited to the income statement
Result of the change in the standard rate of corporation tax credited  
to the income statement 
(Charged)/credited to the statement of comprehensive income
At 1 September 2012 
Credited to the income statement
Prior year adjustment to the income statement 
Result of the change in the standard rate of corporation tax credited  
to the income statement 
Charged to the statement of comprehensive income
At 31 August 2013 

Accelerated
 tax 
depreciation
£m
(70.0)
1.8

Fair value  
gains  
£m 
(3.1) 
2.7 

Retirement 
benefit 
liability 
£m 
(1.0)
– 

5.4
–
(62.8)
0.9
(1.7)

7.3
–
(56.3)

– 
(1.5) 
(1.9) 
0.5 
– 

0.1 
(0.6) 
(1.9) 

– 
1.0 
– 
– 
– 

– 
(0.9)
(0.9)

Total 
£m
(74.1)
4.5

5.4
(0.5)
(64.7)
1.4
(1.7)

7.4
(1.5)
(59.1)

Within other provisions is a deferred tax asset of £4.3 million (2012: £1.7 million) in relation to overseas operations which has 
been recognised. In addition to this there is an unrecognised deferred tax asset of £8.4 million (2012: £11.5 million) relating 
to operations in Denmark and the Republic of Ireland. 

25 Other non-current liabilities 

Other liabilities 

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
322.1 

1 September
 2012
£m
321.9

Included within other liabilities are lease incentives received from landlords either through initial contributions or rent-free 
periods. These incentives are being credited to the income statement on a straight line basis over the term of the relevant 
lease. Additionally, the liability relates to the spreading of the charges relating to leases with fixed annual increments in rent. 

26 Provisions  

At 1 September 2012 
Charged to the income statement
Utilised during the financial year 
At 31 August 2013 

Closure 
provision 
£m
0.1
–
–
0.1

Promotional  
activities  
£m 
4.8 
15.2 
(14.5) 
5.5 

Other 
provisions 
£m 
1.5 
– 
(0.4)
1.1 

Total
£m
6.4
15.2
(14.9)
6.7

Provisions have been analysed between current and non-current as follows: 

Current  
Non-current 

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
5.6 
1.1 
6.7 

1 September
 2012
£m
5.3
1.1
6.4

Closure provision 
Relating to one vacated building which will be utilised over the term of the lease, being the next year. 

Promotional activities provision 
Provisions for promotional activities represent the cost to the business of operating an internal cosmetics loyalty scheme, 
cardholder loyalty scheme and the reward scheme in the Republic of Ireland and they are expected to be utilised during  
the next 12 months. 

Other provisions 
The majority of the Group’s other provisions relate to dilapidations on properties based upon the directors’ best estimate  
of the Group’s future liability. These provisions are expected to be utilised within the next three years. 

 
 
 
 
121 

27 Share capital and reserves 

Issued and fully paid – ordinary shares of £0.0001 each
At start of year 
Allotted under share option schemes 
At end of year 

31 August 2013

1 September 2012

£ 

Number

£ 

Number

128,680 1,286,806,299
37,142
128,684 1,286,843,441

4

128,680 
– 
128,680 

1,286,806,299
–
1,286,806,299

During the financial year ended 31 August 2013, 23,882,722 (2012: 23,559,155) of the above shares were purchased by  
the Company and transferred to treasury. See retained earnings below. 

Employee share trust – interest in share capital 
The number of ordinary shares in the Company held by the DRET was as follows: 

Debenhams Retail Employee Trust 2004  

31 August 
2013 
Ordinary shares  
Number 
473,537 

1 September 
2012
Ordinary shares 
Number
723,536

The market value of the shares on 31 August 2013 was £0.5 million for DRET (2012: £0.7 million). The cost of the shares held  
at the year end is £0.4 million (2012: £0.6 million). 

A description of the nature and purpose of each reserve is set out below: 

Share premium account 
On admission to the London Stock Exchange, the Company issued 358,974,359 shares at £1.95, generating proceeds  
of £700.0 million. Costs directly associated with the issue of the new shares totalled £17.1 million and in accordance  
with the Companies Act these costs were set off against the premium generated on issue of the new shares. 

Merger reserve 
The merger reserve of £1,200.9 million exists as a result of the 2005 Group reconstruction. 

Reverse acquisition reserve 
The reverse acquisition reserve exists as a result of the method of accounting for the 2005 Group reconstruction. In accordance 
with International Accounting Standards, the 2005 Group reconstruction has been accounted for as a reverse acquisition. 

Hedging reserve 
The hedging reserve represents the change in fair value of all interest rate swaps and forward foreign currency contracts which 
have been designated as cash flow hedges. The effective portion of the changes in fair value of derivatives that are designated 
and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in equity. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised 
immediately in the relevant line of the income statement which will be affected by the underlying hedged item. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
122 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

27 Share capital and reserves continued 

Other reserves 
The other reserves represent the change in fair value in respect of the Group’s available-for-sale investments (see note 15)  
and exchange differences arising as part of a reporting entity’s net investment in a foreign operation. Other reserves may  
be analysed as follows: 

At 3 September 2011 
Currency translation differences 
Change in the fair value of available-for-sale investments
At 1 September 2012 
Currency translation differences 
Change in the fair value of available-for-sale investments
At 31 August 2013 

Change in 
fair value of 
available-for-sale 
investments 
£m 
(1.6) 
– 
(0.7) 
(2.3) 
– 
(0.8) 
(3.1) 

Translation 
reserve 
£m
(1.5)
(6.7)
–
(8.2)
3.6
–
(4.6)

Total 
£m
(3.1)
(6.7)
(0.7)
(10.5)
3.6
(0.8)
(7.7)

Retained earnings 
The Company commenced its share buyback programme in April 2012. As at 31 August 2013 the Company had purchased 
47,441,877 ordinary shares of £0.0001 at a total cost of £45.2 million of which 23,882,722 (2012: 23,559,155) ordinary shares of 
£0.0001 were purchased (representing 1.9% of the Company’s share capital) at a cost of £25.1 million (2012: £20.1 million) during 
the financial year. All shares purchased by the Company are transferred to treasury. During the year 655,573 treasury shares 
were transferred out of treasury to satisfy awards granted under the Company’s share plans.  

28 Share-based payments 
The total charge to operating profit relates to the following equity settled schemes: 

Performance Share Plan (“PSP”) 
Executive Share Option Plan (“ESOP”) 
Share Incentive Plan (“SIP”) 
Deferred Bonus Matching Plan (“DBMP”) 
Charge for the financial year  

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
1.3 
– 
0.1 
0.1 
1.5 

1 September
 2012
£m
1.4
0.1
–
0.1
1.6

The following table reconciles the movement in shares awarded under the Company share schemes and the weighted average  
exercise price (“WAEP”) for the ESOP scheme. Grants under the PSP, SIP and DBMP all comprise a right to acquire shares for 
no or nominal consideration.  

Outstanding at 3 September 2011 
Granted 
Forfeited 
Outstanding at 1 September 2012
Granted 
Exercised 
Lapsed 
Forfeited 
Outstanding at 31 August 2013
Exercisable at 31 August 2013 
Weighted average remaining contractual life (years)

DBMP
Number
836,203
–
(248,920)
587,283
–
–
–
(17,604)
569,679
–
–

SIP
Number
650,000
200,000
(400,000)
450,000
200,000
(250,000)
–
(200,000)
200,000
–
–

PSP 
Number 
2,163,737 
5,947,558 
(634,410) 
7,476,885 
4,380,833 
(549,358) 
(1,167,435) 
(406,300) 
9,734,625 
– 
– 

ESOP

Number  WAEP Pence
85.5
962,692 
–
– 
85.5
(131,069)
85.5
831,623 
–
– 
85.5
(143,357)
–
– 
–
– 
688,266 
85.5
688,266 
6.25 

 
 
 
123 

i) The Performance Share Plan  
The PSP allows the Company to grant awards of shares to senior management. An award under the PSP will normally vest on 
the third anniversary of date of grant and must be exercised within six months of vesting. No payment is required for the grant 
of an award. An award under the PSP comprises a right to receive free shares or a nil cost option with performance conditions 
attached. 

Awards granted on 24 November 2009 vested on 24 November 2012. 32% of the awards vested based on an EPS growth  
of 6.1% during the applicable performance period. 

Awards granted on 1 November 2011 and 1 May 2012 
The vesting of the shares granted under these awards is dependent upon the growth of both EPS and Return on Capital  
Employed (“ROCE”).  

75% of the awards is based upon EPS growth. Where growth is less than 6% per annum over the three year period, this element 
of the awards lapses. Where growth is 6% per annum, 30% of the shares awarded vests; where growth is 12% per annum, the 
EPS element of the awards vests in full. Between these two points, awards vest on a straight line basis between 30% and 100%. 

The remaining 25% of the awards is dependent upon ROCE. If average ROCE is below the cost of capital over the three year 
period, this element of the awards lapses. If average ROCE is equal to the cost of capital over the three year period, then 30% 
of the shares awarded vests. If average ROCE is equal to the cost of capital plus 5% then the ROCE element of the awards vests 
in full. Between these two points, awards vest on a straight line basis between 30% and 100%. 

Awards granted on 1 November 2012 and 1 May 2013 
The vesting of the shares granted under these awards is dependent upon the growth of both EPS and ROCE.  

75% of the awards is based upon EPS growth. Where growth is less than 6% per annum over the three year period, this element 
of the awards lapses. Where growth is 6% per annum, 30% of the shares awarded vests; where growth is 12% per annum, the 
EPS element of the awards vests in full. Between these two points, awards vest on a straight line basis between 30% and 100%. 

The remaining 25% of the awards is dependent upon ROCE. If average ROCE is below the cost of capital plus 1% over the  
three year period, this element of the awards lapses. If average ROCE is equal to the cost of capital plus 1% over the three year 
period, then 30% of the shares awarded vests. If average ROCE is equal to the cost of capital plus 5% then the ROCE element  
of the awards vests in full. Between these two points, awards vest on a straight line basis between 30% and 100%. 

In accordance with IFRS 2 “Share-Based Payments”, the vesting conditions attached to the PSP are classified as non-market 
conditions and therefore the shares have been fair valued at face value with a discount to take into account the non-entitlement 
to dividends in the vesting period where relevant. The fair value of these PSP awards is calculated based on a Black-Scholes 
model assuming the inputs shown in the table below: 

Grant date 
Number of shares under award (number) 
Expected term (years) 
Share price at grant (pence) 
Exercise price (pence)  
Risk free rate 
Expected volatility  
Expected dividend yield  
Fair value of award (pence) 

1 May 2013 
580,036 
3.0 
84.5 
– 
0% 
N/A 
3.5% 
76.0 

1 Nov 2012
3,800,797
3.0
123.7
–
0%
N/A
2.4%
115.0

Volatility is a measure of the amount by which the Company’s share price is expected to fluctuate in the period. Where volatility 
has been used in the calculation of the fair value of the award, it has been estimated by using the most recent historical share 
price volatility which is commensurate with the expected term of the option taking into account its contractual life. 

ii) Executive Share Option Plan  
The ESOP allows the Company to grant options to acquire shares to eligible employees. These options will normally become 
exercisable following a three year performance period, only if and to the extent that the performance conditions to which they 
are subject have been satisfied. Once the options have vested, the employees have a seven year period in which to exercise. 
Options are granted with an exercise price equal to the middle market value of the shares on the day immediately preceding 
the date of grant. The options granted on 24 November 2009 became exercisable in full based on ROCE performance 
exceeding the cost of capital by 7.8% during the applicable performance period. There are no unvested options under this plan. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
124 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

28 Share-based payments continued 

iii) Share Incentive Plan  
The SIP allows the Company to grant options to key senior managers below board level, whom the Company wishes to retain  
and incentivise in the short to medium term. Once the options have vested the employee has six months in which to exercise. 

The option granted on 16 November 2010 over 250,000 shares vested on 16 November 2012. 

The option granted on 21 May 2012 over 200,000 shares was forfeited on 30 November 2012.  

Options granted on 6 December 2012 
The option granted 6 December 2012 has a 24 month vesting period based on the employee’s continued employment and 
performance targets specific to the employee’s role within the business and is granted with no exercise price.  

The fair value of the SIP options granted is calculated based on a Black-Scholes model assuming the inputs shown below: 

Grant date 
Number of shares under option (number) 
Expected term (years) 
Share price at grant (pence)  
Exercise price (pence)  
Risk free rate 
Expected volatility 
Expected dividend yield  
Fair value of option (pence)  

6 December 
2012
200,000
2.0
114.8
–
0%
N/A
2.6%
109.0

Volatility is a measure of the amount by which the Company’s share price is expected to fluctuate in the period. Where volatility 
has been used in the calculation of the fair value of the award, it has been estimated by using the most recent historical share 
price volatility which is commensurate with the expected term of the option taking into account its contractual life. 

iv) Deferred Bonus Matching Plan  
The DBMP allows the Company to invite eligible employees to invest up to 100% of their net annual bonus earned into shares 
(“invested shares”). If the participant remains in service for three years and retains the beneficial ownership of all the invested 
shares, s/he will, subject to the satisfaction of certain performance conditions, be entitled to a matching share award equal to 
the amount of the pre-tax bonus that has been invested. Once the options have vested they will be released to the employee 
within one month of the vesting date. 

All bonus eligible employees were offered the opportunity to invest up to 50% of their 2010 bonus into invested shares. The 
entitlement to the matching award is subject to the participant retaining beneficial ownership of their invested shares during the 
performance period and to the achievement of the following performance conditions. The Group’s ROCE must exceed the cost 
of capital by 2% over this period otherwise the options will not vest. The Group’s EPS growth must then exceed 6% per annum 
over the three year period or the options will not vest. If the Group’s EPS growth is 6% or more per annum over the three year 
period 30% of the options will vest; if the growth is 12% or more per annum over the three year period, 100% of the options  
will vest. Between these two points the options will vest on a straight line basis between 30% and 100%. 

29 Operating lease commitments 

The future aggregate minimum lease payments under  
non-cancellable operating leases are as follows: 
Within one year 
Later than one year and less than five years 
After five years 

31 August 2013

1 September 2012

Land and 
buildings 
£m

Other  
£m 

Land and 
buildings 
£m 

 Other 
£m

199.9
830.0
4,080.5
5,110.4

1.5 
2.4 
– 
3.9 

195.0 
787.4 
4,173.8 
5,156.2 

1.4
2.3
–
3.7

The Group leases department stores and warehouses under non-cancellable operating leases. The leases have various terms, 
escalation clauses and renewal rights. The Group also leases vehicles and fixtures and equipment under non-cancellable 
operating leases. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
125 

30 Cash generated from operations 

Profit before taxation 

Depreciation (note 14)  
Amortisation (note 13)  
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Employee options granted during the financial year (note 28) 
Fair value losses/(gains) on derivative instruments 
Net movements in provisions (note 26)  
Finance income  
Finance costs  
Difference between pension credit and contributions paid (note 23) 
Net movement in other long-term receivables 
Net movement in other non-current liabilities 
Changes in working capital 
Increase in inventories  
Increase in trade and other receivables 
Increase in trade and other payables 
Cash generated from operations

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
154.0 

1 September
 2012
£m
158.3

84.4 
10.2 
0.2 
1.5 
2.0 
0.3 
(1.5)
15.5 
(21.7)
3.6 
0.2 

(25.5)
(2.9)
20.8 
241.1 

82.4
9.2
0.2
1.6
(3.1)
(1.0)
(1.2)
17.9
(21.1)
(2.6)
2.9

(11.5)
(4.7)
32.4
259.7

In the cash flow statement, proceeds from the disposal of property, plant and equipment and finance leases comprise: 

Net book value (note 14)  
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment 
Cash proceeds from the disposal of property, plant and equipment 

Non-cash transactions 
Other non-cash changes comprise: 

Amortisation of issue costs relating to debt issues 
Non-cash movements associated with term loan facility 
Revaluation of cash and cash equivalents 
Non-cash movements associated with finance lease obligations
Non-cash transactions 

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
0.2 
(0.2)
– 

1 September
 2012
£m
0.2
(0.2)
–

31 August 
 2013 
 £m 
2.7 
(0.3)
– 
0.5 
2.9 

1 September
 2012
£m
2.9
(0.1)
0.3
6.2
9.3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
126 

Notes to the financial statements continued 

31 Analysis of changes in net debt 

Analysis of net debt 
Cash and cash equivalents  
Bank overdrafts 
Net cash and cash equivalents 
Debt due within one year 
Debt due after one year 
Finance lease obligations due within one year 
Finance lease obligations due after one year 

1 September 
2012
£m

Cash flow  
£m 

Non-cash 
movements 
£m 

31 August
2013
£m

44.0
(9.4)
34.6
(151.8)
(244.8)
(2.2)
(4.5)
(368.7)

(17.0) 
6.5 
(10.5) 
(5.5) 
13.3 
2.3 
– 
(0.4) 

– 
– 
– 
(1.1)
(1.3)
(1.9)
1.4 
(2.9)

27.0
(2.9)
24.1
(158.4)
(232.8)
(1.8)
(3.1)
(372.0)

32 Contingent liabilities 
The Group is subject to litigation from time to time as a result of its activities. The Group establishes provisions in connection 
with litigation where it has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events and where it is more likely than 
not an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated.  

In September 2013, Debenhams plc received a Statement of Objections from the Office of Fair Trading (“OFT”) addressing the 
possibility of anti-competitive behaviour with respect to retail selling prices for the Shock Absorber range of sports bra products 
in the UK during the years of 2009, 2010 and 2011. Debenhams is reviewing the Statement of Objections, will be responding to 
the OFT in due course as required and continues to dispute the OFT’s findings. However, whilst the matter is still under review 
the possibility cannot be ruled out that the Group’s performance, cash flows or financial condition could be affected by the 
outcome of this matter. 

There are a number of contingent liabilities that arise in the normal course of business which if realised are not expected to 
result in a material liability to the Group. 

33 Principal subsidiary undertakings 
The principal subsidiary undertakings of Debenhams plc at 31 August 2013 were as follows: 

Company 
Debenhams Retail plc 
Debenhams Group Holdings Limited* 
Debenhams Retail (Ireland) Limited
Aktieselskabet Th. Wessel & Vett Magasin du Nord 
Debenhams Properties Limited 
Debenhams Hong Kong Limited 

Country of 
registration 

Share of issued 
ordinary share capital 
Activity
and voting rights
England  Department store retailing
100%
Holding company
England 
100%
Ireland  Department store retailing
100%
Denmark  Department store retailing
100%
Property investment
England 
100%
Sourcing of goods
100% Hong Kong Hong Kong 

Country of 
incorporation
UK
UK
Ireland
Denmark
UK

*Denotes investments held by the Company. All other investments are held by subsidiary undertakings. 

The Company has taken advantage of section 410(2) of the Companies Act 2006 to list only its principal subsidiary and 
associated undertakings at 31 August 2013 whose results or financial position, in the opinion of the directors, principally 
affected the financial statements. Unless otherwise stated all of these operate predominantly in the UK. 

All subsidiary companies are consolidated. A full list of subsidiary and other associated undertakings as at 31 August 2013 will 
be annexed to the Company’s next annual return filed with the Registrar of Companies. 

 
 
 
127 

Five year record income statements 

Gross transaction value 
Revenue 
Cost of sales 
Gross profit 
Distribution costs 
Administrative expenses 
Operating profit before exceptional items 
Exceptional items 
Operating profit 
Net finance costs 
Profit before taxation 
Taxation 
Profit for the financial year attributable  
to owners of the parent 

52 weeks
2013
£m
2,776.8
2,282.2
(1,972.1)
310.1
(97.4)
(44.7)
168.0
–
168.0
(14.0)
154.0
(26.1)

52 weeks
2012
£m
2,708.0
2,229.8
(1,927.5)
302.3
(81.0)
(46.3)
175.0
–
175.0
(16.7)
158.3
(33.0)

53 weeks 
2011  
£m 
2,679.3 
2,209.8 
(1,913.1) 
296.7 
(70.2) 
(42.8) 
183.7 
 – 
183.7 
(23.4) 
160.3 
(43.1) 

52 weeks 
2010 
£m 
2,564.3 
2,119.9 
(1,829.5)
290.4 
(55.1)
(40.2)
195.1 
(5.4)
189.7 
(49.8)
139.9 
(42.9)

52 weeks
2009 
£m
2,339.7
1,915.6
(1,650.7)
264.9
(45.3)
(37.4)
182.2
–
182.2
(61.4)
120.8
(25.7)

127.9

125.3

117.2 

97.0 

95.1

 
 
 
128 

Assets 
Non-current assets 
Intangible assets 
Tangible assets 
Financial assets 
Other receivables 
Retirement benefit assets 
Deferred tax assets 
Total non-current assets 
Net current liabilities 
Non-current liabilities 
Net assets 

Shareholders’ equity 
Share capital 
Share premium account 
Other reserves 
Retained earnings 
Total equity 

Five year record balance sheets 

2013
£m

2012
£m

2011  
£m 

2010 
£m 

2009
£m

876.5
692.1
3.0
16.8
4.6
69.3
1,662.3
(271.4)
(646.5)
744.4

0.1
682.9
(3.5)
64.9
744.4

864.9
661.6
2.7
19.3
–
83.2
1,631.7
(267.5)
(703.2)
661.0

0.1
682.9
(12.1)
(9.9)
661.0

858.1 
634.6 
4.0 
18.3 
3.9 
75.7 
1,594.6 
(292.0) 
(643.0) 
659.6 

0.1 
682.9 
(8.3) 
(15.1) 
659.6 

846.2 
676.1 
8.7 
17.2 
– 
92.0 
1,640.2 
(636.5)
(500.3)
503.4 

0.1 
682.9 
(3.4)
(176.2)
503.4 

839.9
669.2
9.0
–
–
80.6
1,598.7
(74.4)
(1,099.0)
425.3

0.1
682.9
288.9
(546.6)
425.3

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
129 

Independent auditors’ report to the 
members of Debenhams plc (Company) 

We have audited the parent company financial statements of Debenhams plc for the year ended 31 August 2013 which 
comprise the Company balance sheet and the related notes. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in 
their preparation is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice). 

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors 
As explained more fully in the statement of directors’ responsibilities set out on page 83, the directors are responsible for  
the preparation of the parent company financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our 
responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the parent company financial statements in accordance with applicable  
law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices 
Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors.  

This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the Company’s members as a body in accordance  
with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept  
or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands  
it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing. 

Scope of the audit of the financial statements 
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable 
assurance that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes  
an assessment of: whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the parent company’s circumstances and have been 
consistently applied and adequately disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the directors; 
and the overall presentation of the financial statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information  
in the annual report and accounts to identify material inconsistencies with the audited financial statements. If we become  
aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report. 

Opinion on financial statements  
In our opinion the parent company financial statements:  
•  Give a true and fair view of the state of the Company’s affairs as at 31 August 2013; 
•  Have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and  
•  Have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006. 

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006 
In our opinion:  
•  The part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies 

Act 2006; and  

•  The information given in the directors’ report for the financial year for which the parent company financial statements  

are prepared is consistent with the parent company financial statements. 

Matters on which we are required to report by exception 
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if,  
in our opinion:  
•  Adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been 

received from branches not visited by us; or  

•  The parent company financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in 

agreement with the accounting records and returns; or  

•  Certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or  
•  We have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

Other matter 
We have reported separately on the Group financial statements of Debenhams plc for the year ended 31 August 2013. 

Martin Hodgson (Senior Statutory Auditor) 
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP 
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 
London 

24 October 2013 

 
 
130 

Company Balance Sheet 
Company number 5448421 
As at 31 August 2013 

Assets 
Total fixed assets 
Investments  
Derivative financial instruments 

Current assets 
Debtors 
Cash at bank and in hand 

Current liabilities 
Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 
Derivative financial instruments 

Net current liabilities 
Total assets less current liabilities  
Non-current liabilities 
Bank overdraft and borrowings  
Derivative financial instruments 

Net assets 

Shareholders’ equity 
Called-up share capital 
Share premium account 
Hedging reserve 
Retained earnings 
Total equity 

31 August 
2013 
£m 

1 September 
2012 
£m 

Note  

4  
5 

6 
7 

8 
5  

9  
5 

12  
13  
13  
13  
14  

2,248.0 
0.7 
2,248.7 

89.9 
0.9 
90.8 

(715.7)
(0.5)
(716.2)
(625.4)
1,623.3 

(246.3)
(3.4)
(249.7)
1,373.6 

0.1 
682.9 
(2.5)
693.1 
1,373.6 

2,745.9
–
2,745.9

135.5
–
135.5

(1,175.3)
–
(1,175.3)
(1,039.8)
1,706.1

(244.8)
(8.3)
(253.1)
1,453.0

0.1
682.9
(6.4)
776.4
1,453.0

The financial statements on pages 130 to 137 were approved by the board on 24 October 2013 and were signed  
on its behalf by: 

Simon Herrick 
Chief Financial Officer 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
131 

Notes to the Company  
financial statements 
For the financial year ended 31 August 2013 

1 Accounting policies 

Basis of preparation 
These financial statements have been prepared on the going concern basis and in accordance with UK GAAP using the historical cost 
convention as modified by financial assets and financial liabilities (including derivative instruments) at fair value through profit or loss. 
These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with applicable accounting standards within the United Kingdom and the 
Companies Act 2006. 

The principal accounting policies, which have been applied consistently for each financial year unless stated otherwise, are set out below. 

Exemptions 
The directors have taken advantage of the exemption available under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and have not presented  
a profit and loss account for the Company alone. However, the Company’s profit and loss account has been produced for approval  
by the board. 

The Company is also exempt under the terms of FRS 8 “Related Party Disclosures” from disclosing related party transactions with entities 
that are wholly owned subsidiaries. 

The consolidated financial statements of the Group include a consolidated cash flow statement which includes the cash flows  
of the Company.  

Investments 
Investments comprise the Company’s investment in subsidiaries and are shown at cost less any provision for impairment. 

Impairment testing 
Assets that have an indefinite useful life are not subject to amortisation and are tested annually for impairment. Assets that are subject  
to amortisation are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be 
recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by which the asset’s carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount.  
The recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s net realisable value and value-in-use. 

Borrowings 
All borrowings are stated at the fair value of the consideration received after deduction of issue costs. Issue costs, together with finance 
costs, are charged to the profit and loss account over the term of the borrowings. Finance costs represent a constant proportion of  
the balance of capital repayments outstanding. 

Revenue recognition 
i) Interest income 
Interest receivable and interest payable are recognised in the period to which they relate using the effective interest method. 

ii) Dividend income 
Dividend income is recognised when the right to receive payment is established. 

Taxation 
Current tax is provided at amounts expected to be paid (or recovered) using the tax rates that are in force during the period. 

Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date where 
transactions or events that result in an obligation to pay more tax in the future or a right to pay less tax in the future have occurred at the 
balance sheet date. Timing differences are differences between the taxable profits and the results as stated in the financial statements  
that arise from the inclusion of gains and losses in tax assessments in periods different from those in which they are recognised in the 
financial statements. 

Deferred tax is measured on a non-discounted basis. A deferred tax asset is regarded as recoverable and therefore recognised only when, 
on the basis of all available evidence, it can be regarded as more likely than not that there will be taxable profits from which the future 
reversal of the underlying timing differences can be deducted. 

Deferred tax is measured at the average tax rates which are expected to apply in the periods in which the timing differences are expected 
to reverse, based upon tax rates and laws which have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. 

Dividend distribution 
A final dividend distribution to the Company’s shareholders is recognised as a liability in the Company’s financial statements  
in the period in which the dividend is approved by the Company’s shareholders. Interim dividends are recognised when paid. 

 
 
 
132 

Notes to the Company financial statements continued 

1 Accounting policies continued 

Share-based payments 
The Company issues equity-settled share-based payments to certain employees. A fair value for the equity-settled share awards is 
measured at the date of grant. The Company measures the fair value of each award using the Black-Scholes model where appropriate. 

The fair value determined at the grant date is expensed on a straight line basis over the vesting period, based on the Company’s estimate 
of the shares that will eventually vest and adjusted for the effect of non-market-based vesting conditions. At each balance sheet date,  
the Company revises its estimates of the number of options that are expected to vest. Non-market performance and service conditions 
are included in assumptions about the number of options that are expected to vest. It recognises the impact of the revision to original 
estimates, if any, in the profit and loss account, with a corresponding adjustment to equity. 

When the options are exercised, the Company may issue new shares or utilise shares held as treasury shares or within the Debenhams 
Retail Employee Trust. The proceeds received net of any directly attributable transaction costs are credited to share capital (at nominal 
value) and share premium when the options are exercised. 

Where the Company has granted options over the Company’s shares to employees of its subsidiaries, a capital contribution has been 
deemed made by the Company. This is then recharged to the subsidiary and is based on the fair value of the options issued spread over 
the options vesting period. 

Foreign exchange 
Transactions denominated in foreign currencies are translated into the respective functional currency at the exchange rates prevailing  
at the dates of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities that are denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling  
at the closing rates ruling at the balance sheet date.  

Derivatives 
The derivative instruments used by the Company to manage its interest rate risk are interest rate swaps. 

Derivatives are initially recognised at fair value on the date a derivative contract is entered into and are subsequently re-measured at  
fair value. The method of recognising the resulting gain or loss depends on whether the derivative is designated as an effective hedging 
instrument and the nature of the item being hedged. The Company designates certain derivatives as hedges of highly probable forecast 
transactions (cash flow hedges). 

The Company documents, at the inception of the transaction, the relationship between hedging instruments and hedged items as  
well as its risk management objectives and strategy for undertaking various hedge transactions. The Company also documents its 
assessment, both at the inception and on an ongoing basis, of whether the derivatives that are used in hedging transactions are  
highly effective in offsetting changes in cash flows of hedged items. 

i) Cash flow hedges 
The effective portion of the changes in fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as cash flow hedges is recognised in equity. 
The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the relevant line of the profit and loss account which will  
be affected by the underlying hedged item. 

Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified and adjusted against the initial measurement of the underlying hedged item when  
the underlying hedged item is recognised on the balance sheet or in the profit and loss account. 

When a hedged instrument expires, is sold or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting  
is discontinued. Any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time is held in equity until the forecast transaction occurs.  
When a forecasted transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately 
reclassified to the relevant line of the profit and loss account which would have been affected by the forecasted transaction. 

ii) Derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting 
Certain derivatives do not qualify for hedge accounting. Changes in fair value of any derivative instruments that do not qualify for hedge 
accounting are recognised immediately in the profit and loss account. 

Share capital 
Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares are shown as a deduction,  
net of tax, from the proceeds. 

Where the Company purchases its own ordinary shares, the consideration paid, including any directly attributable incremental costs  
(net of income taxes), is deducted from equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders until the shares are cancelled or reissued. 
Where such ordinary shares are subsequently reissued, any consideration received, net of any directly attributable incremental transaction 
costs together with the related income tax effects, is included in equity attributable to the Company’s equity holders. 

 
 
 
133 

2 Profit and loss account 
A loss of £18.3 million is attributable to shareholders for the financial year ended 31 August 2013 (2012: profit of £112.4 million).  

The contracts of employment for all the executive directors are held by Debenhams plc. The total cost of employing the directors  
is disclosed in the remuneration report. 

Auditors’ remuneration of £0.1 million (2012: £0.1 million) is borne by another Group undertaking and relates to the audit of the Company 
financial statements. 

3 Dividends 

Final paid 2.3 pence (2012: 2.0 pence) per £0.0001 share
–  Settled in cash 
Interim paid 1.0 pence (2012: 1.0 pence) per £0.0001 share
–  Settled in cash 

31 August 
 2013 
£m 

1 September
 2012 
£m

28.9 

12.5 

41.4 

25.6

12.9

38.5

A final dividend of 2.3 pence per share (2012: 2.0 pence per share) was paid during the year in respect of the financial year ended  
1 September 2012, together with an interim dividend of 1.0 pence per share (2012: 1.0 pence per share) in respect of the financial year 
ended 31 August 2013. The directors are proposing a final dividend in respect of the financial year ended 31 August 2013 of  
2.4 pence per share (2012: 2.3 pence per share), which will absorb an estimated £29.4 million (2012: £28.9 million) of shareholders’  
funds. It will be paid on 10 January 2014 to shareholders who are on the register of members at close of business on 6 December 2013.  
No liability is recorded in the financial statements in respect of the final dividend as it was not approved at the balance sheet date. 

4 Investments 

Cost 
At 1 September 2012  
Group reorganisation 
At 31 August 2013 
Provision for impairment 
At 1 September 2012 
Release of impairment on Group reorganisation 
At 31 August 2013 

Net book value 
At 31 August 2013 

At 1 September 2012 

Investments in 
subsidiary 
undertakings 
£m

4,068.8
(692.9)
3,375.9

1,322.9
(195.0)
1,127.9

2,248.0

2,745.9

Investment in subsidiary undertakings 
During the year the Company reduced its investments in various subsidiary companies as part of a legal entity reorganisation in the normal 
course of business which resulted in a reduction in the level of investments of £497.9 million (2012: £nil). 

In accordance with FRS 11 “Impairment of Fixed Assets and Goodwill,” the carrying values of the Company’s subsidiary undertakings  
have been compared to their recoverable amounts represented by the value-in-use to the Company. The review has resulted in an 
impairment of £nil (2012: £nil). The discount rate used in the calculation to arrive at the valuation was 7.4% (2012: 8.2%) on a post-tax basis. 
The directors consider that the carrying value of the investments is supported by their underlying net assets. The pre-tax rate was 7.6% 
(2012: 8.4%). 

The principal subsidiary undertakings of the Company at 31 August 2013 are shown in note 33 of the Debenhams Group  
financial statements. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
134 

Notes to the Company financial statements continued 

5 Derivative financial instruments 

Non-current assets 
Interest rate swaps – cash flow hedges
Current liabilities 
Interest rate swaps – cash flow hedges
Non-current liabilities 
Interest rate swaps – cash flow hedges  

31 August 
 2013 
£m 

1 September
 2012 
£m

0.7 

(0.5)

(3.4)
(3.2)

–

–

(8.3)
(8.3)

Information relating to the derivatives held by the Company is shown in note 22 of the Debenhams Group financial statements. 

6 Debtors 

Deferred tax asset (note 11)  
Amounts owed by Group undertakings 
Prepayments 

31 August 
 2013 
£m 
0.7 
88.5 
0.7 
89.9 

1 September
 2012 
£m
1.9
133.6
–
135.5

Amounts owed by Group undertakings are unsecured, repayable on demand and carry an average rate of interest of 2.5% (2012: 3.0%). 

7 Cash at bank and in hand 

Cash at bank and in hand 

8 Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 

Bank borrowings (note 10) 
Amounts owed to Group undertakings 
Accruals  

31 August 
 2013 
£m 
0.9 

1 September
 2012 
£m
–

31 August 
 2013 
£m 
167.5 
547.3 
0.9 
715.7 

1 September
 2012 
£m
151.8
1,022.9
0.6
1,175.3

Amounts owed to Group undertakings are unsecured, have no fixed date of redemption and either carry an average interest rate of 2.5% 
(2012: 3.0%) or are interest free. 

9 Creditors: amounts falling due after more than one year 

Bank borrowings (note 10) 

31 August 
 2013 
£m 
246.3 

1 September
 2012 
£m
244.8

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
135 

10 Borrowings 

Creditors: amounts falling due within one year 
Revolving credit facility  
Less: issue costs  

Creditors: amounts falling due in more than one year 
Term loan facility  
Less: issue costs  

Maturity of debt 

Amounts falling due: 
In one year or less or on demand  
In more than two years but not more than five years 

31 August 
 2013 
£m 

1 September
 2012 
£m

170.0 
(2.5)
167.5 

250.0 
(3.7)
246.3 

155.0
(3.2)
151.8

250.0
(5.2)
244.8

31 August 
 2013 
£m 

1 September
 2012 
£m

170.0 
250.0 
420.0 

155.0
250.0
405.0

Information relating to the borrowings of the Company is shown in note 20 of the Debenhams Group financial statements. 

The Company has a £650.0 million credit facility comprising a term loan of £250.0 million and a Revolving Credit Facility (“RCF”) of  
£400.0 million. £100.0 million of these facilities expire in October 2015, with the balance extending to October 2016. At 31 August 2013 the 
Company’s facilities outstanding comprised the term loan of £250.0 million (2012: £250.0 million) and RCF drawings of £170.0 million (2012: 
£155.0 million). During the current and prior financial years the Company has complied with its covenants relating to its credit facilities. 

Issue costs, which mainly relate to facility costs, are being amortised over the term of the facilities to October 2016 at the effective interest 
rate based on the committed amount of the term loan. The total amortisation charge relating to the issue costs of the Company’s credit 
facilities for the financial year ended 31 August 2013 was £2.7 million (2012: £2.9 million). 

11 Deferred taxation 

At 1 September 2012 – asset 
Credited to reserves 
At 31 August 2013 – asset 

Fair value
 gains 
£m
1.9
(1.2)
0.7

Deferred tax is calculated in full on all temporary differences under the liability method using a tax rate of 22.2% (2012: 23.0%) for 
temporary differences expected to reverse within 12 months of the balance sheet date and 20.0% for temporary differences expected  
to reverse more than one year after the balance sheet date (2012: 23.0%) for the UK differences. The Finance Act 2013, which became 
substantively enacted on 2 July 2013, included legislation reducing the main rate of corporation tax from 23.0% to 21.0% from 1 April 2014 
with a further reduction in the main rate of corporation tax to 20.0% from 1 April 2015. 

The effect of the reduction in the corporation tax rate enacted in the 2013 Act has been to reduce the net deferred tax asset recognised  
at 3 September 2012 by approximately £0.2 million. 

Deferred tax provided on the fair value gains represents the deferred tax on the derivatives that qualify for cash flow hedges. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
136 

Notes to the Company financial statements continued 

12 Called-up share capital 

Issued and fully paid – ordinary shares of £0.0001 each
At start of year 
Allotted under share option schemes
At end of year 

31 August 2013
£ 

Number 

1 September 2012

£ 

Number

128,680
4
128,684

1,286,806,299 
37,142 
1,286,843,441 

128,680 
– 
128,680 

1,286,806,299
–
1,286,806,299

The Company commenced its share buyback programme in April 2012. As at 31 August 2013 the Company had purchased 47,441,877 
ordinary shares of £0.0001 at a total cost of £45.2 million of which 23,882,722 (2012: 23,559,155) ordinary shares of £0.0001 were purchased 
(representing 1.9% of the Company’s share capital) at a cost of £25.1 million (2012: £20.1 million) during the financial year. All shares 
purchased by the Company are transferred to treasury. During the year 655,573 treasury shares were transferred out of treasury to satisfy 
awards granted under the Company’s share plans.  

The number of ordinary shares in the Company held by the Debenhams Retail Employee Trust 2004 (“DRET”) in connection with the 
Group’s employee ownership plan described is as follows: 

Debenhams Retail Employee Trust 2004 

31 August 
2013 
Ordinary 
shares 
Number 
473,537 

1 September 
2012 
Ordinary 
shares 
Number
723,536

The market value of the shares at 31 August 2013 was £0.5 million for the DRET (2012: £0.7 million). The cost of the shares held at the year 
end was £0.4 million (2012: £0.6 million). 

Share option schemes 
At 31 August 2013 the Group had four schemes in operation: the Performance Share Plan (“PSP”), the Executive Share Option Plan 
(“ESOP”), the Share Incentive Plan (“SIP”) and the Deferred Bonus Matching Plan (“DBMP”).  

For further information on these schemes please see note 28 of the Debenhams Group financial statements. 

13 Reserves 

At 1 September 2012  
Loss for the financial year 
Cash flow hedges – net fair value gains (net of tax)  
Employee share ownership plans (net of tax)  
Purchase of treasury shares 
Dividends to shareholders (note 3) 
At 31 August 2013 

Share 
premium  
account  
£m 
682.9 
– 
– 
– 
– 
– 
682.9 

Hedging 
reserve 
£m 
(6.4)
– 
3.9
– 
– 
– 
(2.5)

Profit and loss 
account 
£m
776.4
(18.3)
–
1.5
(25.1)
(41.4)
693.1

Share premium account 
On admission to the London Stock Exchange, the Company issued 358,974,359 shares at £1.95, generating proceeds of £700.0 million. 
Costs directly associated with the issue of the new shares totalled £17.1 million and in accordance with the Companies Act these costs 
were set off against the premium generated on issue of the new shares. 

Hedging reserve 
The hedging reserve represents the change in fair value of the interest rate swaps which have been designated as cash flow hedges. 

Profit and loss account 
A dividend of £41.4 million (2012: £38.5 million) was paid by the Company during the financial year ended 31 August 2013. 

 
 
 
 
 
 
137 

14 Reconciliation of movements in shareholders’ funds 

(Loss)/profit for the financial year 
Dividends paid (note 3)  
(Accumulated deficit)/retained profit for the year 
Cash flow hedges: 
–  Net fair value gains/(losses), net of tax 
Purchase of treasury shares 
Employee share ownership plans, net of tax 
Net (decrease)/increase to shareholders’ funds 
Opening shareholders’ funds  
Closing shareholders’ funds 

31 August 
 2013 
£m 
(18.3)
(41.4)
(59.7)

1 September
 2012 
£m
112.4
(38.5)
73.9

3.9 
(25.1)
1.5 
(79.4)
1,453.0 
1,373.6 

(3.5)
(20.1)
1.6
51.9
1,401.1
1,453.0

15 Contingent liabilities 
There are a number of contingent liabilities that arise in the normal course of business which if realised are not expected to result in a 
material liability to the Company. 

 
 
 
 
 
138

Store list

UK
Aberdeen
Altrincham
Ashford
Ayr
Ballymena
Banbury
Bangor 
Barrow
Basildon
Basingstoke
Bath
Bedford
Belfast
Birmingham
Birmingham Fort
Blackburn
Blackpool
Bolton
Bournemouth
Brighton
Bristol
Bromley
Bury (Gtr Manchester)
Bury St Edmunds
Cambridge
Canterbury
Cardiff
Carlisle
Carmarthen
Chatham
Chelmsford
Cheltenham
Chester
Chesterfield
Clapham
Colchester
Coventry
Crawley
Croydon
Derby
Doncaster
Dumfries
Dundee
Dunfermline
East Kilbride
Eastbourne
Edinburgh
Eltham
Exeter
Falkirk
Fareham
Farnborough
Folkestone

Orpington
Oxford
Perth
Plymouth
Portsmouth
Preston
Reading
Redditch
Romford
Rushmere
Salisbury
Scarborough
Sheffield
Sheffield – Meadowhall
Slough
Southampton
Southend
Southport
Southsea
South Shields
Staines
Stirling
Stockport
Stockton
Stratford-upon-Avon
Sunderland
Sutton
Swansea
Swindon
Taunton
Telford
Torquay
Truro 
Uxbridge
Wakefield
Walsall
Walton
Warrington
Welwyn Garden City
Westwood Cross
Weymouth
Wigan
Wimbledon
Winchester
Witney
Woking
Worcester
Workington
Worthing 
Wrexham
York 

Foyleside
Gateshead – 
Metro Centre
Glasgow
Glasgow Silverburn
Gloucester
Gravesend
Great Yarmouth
Guildford
Hanley
Harrogate
Harrow
Hastings
Hemel Hempstead
Hounslow
Hull
Ilford
Inverness
Ipswich
Kidderminster
King’s Lynn
Kirkcaldy
Lakeside
Leeds – City Centre 
Leeds – White Rose
Leicester
Leith
Lichfield
Lincoln
Liverpool
Livingston
Llandudno
Llanelli
London – Oxford Street
London – Westfield
Luton
Manchester
Manchester – 
Trafford Park
Mansfield 
Merryhill
Merthyr Tydfil
Middlesbrough
Milton Keynes
Monks Cross
Newbridge
Newbury – Outlet
Newbury – Parkway
Newcastle-upon-Tyne
Newry
Northampton
Norwich
Nottingham
Nuneaton
Oldham

International 
Magasin du Nord
Århus
Field’s – Copenhagen
Kgs Nytorv – 
Copenhagen
Lyngby
Odense
Rødovre
Republic of Ireland
Cork – Mahon Point
Cork – Patrick Street
Dublin – Blackrock
Dublin – Blanchardstown
Dublin – Henry Street
Dublin – Tallaght
Galway
Limerick
Newbridge
Tralee
Waterford
Franchise stores
Armenia
Yerevan
Azerbaijan 
Baku
Bahrain 
Manama
Bulgaria 
Sofia – Bulgaria Mall
Cyprus 
Apollon
Central
Engomi
Kinyras
Korivos
Ledra
Nicosia
Olympia
Zenon
Czech Republic 
Prague
Egypt 
Alexandria
Estonia 
Tallinn*
Georgia
Tblisi
Iceland 
Reykjavik
India 
Bangalore 
Mumbai
Indonesia 
Jakarta Senayan City
Karawaci
Kemang Village

Iran 
Mashad
Shiraz
Tehran
Tehran Jame Jam
Jordan 
Amman
Kuwait 
Airport
Avenues
Souq Sharq
Libya 
Tripoli* 
Malaysia 
Kuala Lumpur – 
Star Hill 
Kuala Lumpur – 
The Curve
Penang*
Malta 
Paola
Tigne Point
Philippines 
Davao Abreeza Mall
Manila – Glorieta
Manila – Shangri La
Manila – Trinoma
Paeso Santa Rosa
Qatar 
Doha
Russia
Moscow
Pakistan
Karachi
Saudi Arabia 
Dhahran Mall
Jeddah – Bin Homran
Jeddah – Mall of Arabia
Madinah Al Noor
Mecca Abra Al Bait
Riyadh – Gallery Mall
Riyadh – Granada Mall
Riyadh – Kingdom Mall
Riyadh – Rabwa
Riyadh – Sahara Mall
Turkey 
Istanbul
UAE 
Abu Dhabi – Dalma
Abu Dhabi – Khalidja 
Mall
Dubai – Deira
Dubai – Ibn Battuta
Dubai – Dubai Mall 
Dubai – Mall of Emirates
Dubai – Mirdiff
Sharjah Sahara Centre
Vietnam 
Ho Chi Minh City

*Opened after 31 August 2013.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013139

Glossary and references

Concessions
Brands which are sold through our stores where the stock belongs to a third party 
concessionaire. They are found chiefly in womenswear (e.g. Wallis, Oasis, Warehouse) 
and accessories (e.g. Tripp luggage).

Core brands
Brands designed and produced exclusively by Debenhams. They include brands such  
as Collection, Mantaray, Maine New England and Red Herring. They are found in 
all product categories.

Designers at Debenhams
Exclusive diffusion ranges designed for Debenhams by leading international designers 
including Jasper Conran, John Rocha and Julien Macdonald.

Earnings per share (EPS) 
The profit for the year attributable to shareholders, divided by the weighted average 
number of shares in issue. 

EBITDA
Earnings before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation.

Footfall 
The number of people who visit our stores. 

Free cash flow
Cash generated from operations before exceptional items less net cash used  
in investing activities.

Gross margin 
Gross transaction value less the cost of goods sold, as a percentage of gross  
transaction value.

Gross transaction value (GTV)
Sales (excluding VAT) on a gross basis before adjusting for concessions, consignments 
and staff discounts. All references to sales in this report refer to GTV. All references to 
revenue refer to statutory revenue.

International brands
Brands such as Levis, Ben Sherman, Clarins and Estée Lauder for which  
Debenhams owns the stock.

International segment
Comprises sales to international franchise partners, stores in Denmark and the Republic 
of Ireland and online orders delivered outside the UK.

Market share 
The percentage of the market or market segment that is being serviced  
by Debenhams. For instance, if 100 T-shirts were sold a year in the UK  
and Debenhams sold ten of them, it would have 10 % market share. 

Market share references
All references to clothing/footwear/accessories, womenswear, menswear, childrenswear 
and online market share relate to Kantar Worldpanel Fashion 24 weeks market share to 
1 September 2013 vs. 2012. All references to beauty market share relate to NPD 52 weeks 
to August 2013. All references to home and furniture market share relate to GfK EPOS 
panel 52 weeks to September 2013.

Multi-channel
Multi-channel sales comprise those from online, mobile, instore ordering  
and click and collect. We use online sales as a measure of the growth  
of the multi-channel business as it is the largest of these sales channels.

Own bought brands
Brands for which Debenhams owns the stock. They include core brands,  
Designers at Debenhams and international brands.

Own brands
Debenhams’ exclusive brands, comprising core brands and Designers at Debenhams.

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013140

Shareholder information

Debenhams plcAnnual Report and Accounts 2013Registered office and head office10 Brock Street Regent’s Place London NW1 3FG Registered in England and Wales Company number: 5448421Financial advisorsLazard 50 Stratton Street London W1J 8LLStockbrokersCitigroup Global Markets Limited Citigroup Centre Canada Square London E14 5LBOriel Securities Limited 150 Cheapside London EC2V 6ETSolicitorsFreshfields Bruckhaus Deringer 65 Fleet Street London EC4Y 1HSIndependent auditorsPricewaterhouseCoopers LLP Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors 1 Embankment Place London WC2N 6RHRegistrarsEquiniti Limited Aspect House Spencer Road Lancing West Sussex BN99 6DA Telephone: 0871 384 2766* www.shareview.co.uk*  Calls to this number cost 8p per minute plus network extras.  Lines are open 8.30am to 5.30pm, Monday to Friday.Designed and produced by luminous.co.uk

Printed in-house by Debenhams

www.debenhams.com

10 Brock Street, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3FG 
www.debenhams.com